TC07&TC06

TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S Card
Type No. 914 22 01 / 914 22 21
Operating instructions
03/2008 en
These operating instructions contain information protected by copyright. No part of these operating instruc-
tions may be copied, printed, filmed or reproduced, processed, duplicated or disseminated by any other
means, either in whole or in part, without our prior written consent.
We are not liable for damage or problems arising from the use of items of special equipment, parts and
replacement parts which are not original Trützschler products or replacement parts.
Some of the functions described here may not be available, depending on the version and construction of
the machine.
© 2008 Trützschler GmbH & Co. KG, Mönchengladbach
Translation of the original operating instructions
All rights reserved
Trützschler GmbH & Co. KG

Textilmaschinenfabrik
D-41241 Mönchengladbach
Postfach 41 01 64
Telephone +49 2166 607-0
Fax +49 2166 607-405
E-mail info@truetzschler.de
Internet www.truetzschler.com
Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
About these operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Proper use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Definition of machine sides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Type plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Safety measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Organisational measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Safety of persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Safety devices on the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Symbols employed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Conventions employed in these operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Functions of the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Assembly groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
DIRECTFEED tuft feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
SENSOFEED integral tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
EASYFEED feed tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
WEBFEED licker-in unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
The MULTI WEBCLEAN system and the revolving flats system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Doffer section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Web doffing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Sliver feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Options for sliver delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
The card's operating unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Basic keys (inch, stop, start) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
T-CON – Determining the effective carding gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Daily start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Preparing the machine surroundings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Switching on the card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Switching on after an emergency stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Preparing and starting the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Piecing up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Changing operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Dealing with faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Can change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Initiating manual can change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Automatic can change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Optimising the carding gap with T-CON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
T-CON in normal mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
T-CON flow chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
T-CON Gap advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Switching off the card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Control settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Code levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Language and units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Operator management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Lot management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Machine configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Main drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Sliver deposit system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Can diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Card feeding device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
T-CON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
PFS-M flats adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
PMS-M blade adjustment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Filter box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Separate flat strips suction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Fan MTT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
DFK slide valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
WEBFEED Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Servo drive type depositing system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Continuous suction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Machine settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Pulley diameter for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
DFK roll speed limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Webspeed OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Blade cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Can monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Sliver cutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Lower can changing speed for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Web thickness tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Suction pressure too low – cylinder off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Quality error acknowledge only with code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Thick spots monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Fan MTT active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Lot data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Sliver count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Delivery speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
DFK target pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Draft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Draft V4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Card – coiler tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Starting speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Slow speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Can change speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Can filling quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Rotary can plate drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Flats speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Main cylinder speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Speed Licker in 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
PMS-M blade adjustment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Speed for WEBFEED Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Adjusting the PFS-M carding gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Setting limit values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
CV value limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Thick spot limit value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
T-CON monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
TC-NCT limit values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

NCT monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Service functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
DFK active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Funnel control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Suction pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Metal detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Test door locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
NCT monitor on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Diagnostics / Statistic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Log book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Sensors / measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Shift data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Quality / statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Overview of lot data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Production and quality data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Quality diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
T-CON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Can data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Machine balancing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Mechanical settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Basic setting work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Setting the squeezing rolls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Selecting delivery rolls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Replacing the delivery rolls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Setting the delivery rolls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Setting the flexible bends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Tuft feeder feed roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
SENSOFEED integral tray (TC 07) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
EASYFEED feed tray (TC 06) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Setting the PMS-M opening angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Calibrating the feed table thick spots monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Setting the depth of penetration of the flat strips roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Gearing diagram for rolls and drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Changing draft V3 on the stripping roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Setting draft V4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Setting the speed of the cleaning roll for the stripper roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Setting the braking unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Setting the DFK outlet filter for transport air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Settings for 100 % cotton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Settings dependent on production and speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Licker-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Basic setting for MTT extensions bends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Revolving flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Revolving flats details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Fixed flats in the pre-carding area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Fixed flats in the post-carding area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Doffer section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Lower cover sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Change points, drive pulleys and rotational speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Settings for 100 % polyester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Licker-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Basic setting for MTT extensions bends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Revolving flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Revolving flats details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Fixed flats in the post-carding area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Doffer section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Change points, drive pulleys and rotational speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Settings for 100 % viscose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Licker-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Revolving flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Doffer section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Settings for polyacrylic, blends and recycled material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Licker-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Revolving flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Doffer section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Current settings on this machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
DIRECTFEED tuft feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Licker-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Revolving flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Doffer section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Fault messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Structure of a fault message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Fault table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
LED displays in the control cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Servo modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
TMS-2 control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
LEDs of the servo modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
LEDs of the TMS-2 modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Frequency converter LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
RIK module LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Reversing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Inspection intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Service mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Service menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Checking and setting belt tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Measuring and setting the tension on the flats transport belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Checking the setpoints of the pneumatic connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Checking the ICFD value (TC 07 SENSOFEED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Checking the ICFD value (TC 06 EASYFEED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Checking the T-CON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Checking the valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Checking the motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Checking the drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Checking the clothings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
General cleaning instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Maintenance and cleaning schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Cleaning all suction hoods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Cleaning the DFK tuft feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Cleaning the flat strips roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Cleaning revolving flats area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Cleaning the doffer section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Cleaning the web doffing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Replacing the delivery rolls belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Cleaning the guiding profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Cleaning the main cylinder covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Cleaning the channel connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Servicing the TC-CI compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Cleaning the TC-FB filter box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Servicing the TC-TS transverse web delivery belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Servicing the WEBFEED Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Maintenance / repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Different clothing types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Activating and grinding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Service intervals for standard clothings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Service intervals for long-life clothings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Activating clothings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Removing the twin top cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Replacing the strips with clothing of the twin top cassettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Re-installing the twin top cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Replacing MAGNOTOP clothing strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Replacing the flats transport belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Attaching the flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Setting the graphite pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Setting the flats run monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Card lubrication schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Left-hand machine side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Right-hand machine side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Table of lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Technical specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
General data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Dust extraction unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Waste suction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Continuous power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
ISO 4871 noise emission values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Standard equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Options and additional equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Specialist terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Expendable parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Delivery in a container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Delivery without a container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Stopping the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Introduction
Introduction
In this chapter you will find important safety instruc- About these operating
tions as well as explanations of the structure of this
set of operating instructions and the symbols and instructions
conventions employed. These operating instructions describe how to oper-
ate and service the machine correctly.
How to use this manual Initial start-up and stoppage are not contained in
these operating instructions as these tasks must be
This manual contains a description of the machine
carried out by Trützschler after-sales service staff
and then describes basic operation for every day
only. This also applies to temporary stoppage of the
usage. In the chapter, Settings, you will find full
machine, for instance, if the machine is to be trans-
explanations of all options for setting the machine
ferred to another location.
in order to meet to your own requirements. After the
chapter on Faults and how to remedy them, Main- Trützschler attaches great importance to you oper-
tenance is described. ating the machine safely, correctly and economi-
cally. It is therefore imperative that you read these
The information in these operating instructions can
operating instructions manual through carefully
be accessed in three ways:
before you start to work with the card. The opera-
– By reading the text in the order it is presented. tion instructions contain important information that
will help you to avoid hazards and to increase the
– By searching in the table of contents for the
reliability and service life of the machine and the
required information.
attached components.
– The detailed index (table of key words) leads
Read the section Safety measures for your own
you to the sections of the operating and ser-
safety. Follow all the instructions precisely so that
vice manual you are looking for.
you do not endanger yourself or other colleagues
and in order to avoid damage to the machine.
Should you have any questions about the opera-
tion of the machine which are not answered in
these operating instructions, please contact:
Postfach 41 01 64
Telephone +49 2166 607-0
Fax +49 2166 607-209
E-mail service@truetzschler.de
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 9

Introduction
Proper use
The TC type cards are designed exclusively for
carding natural and synthetic fibres. Types TC 06
and TC 07 are designed for pure cotton, type
TC 07S for
– 100 % synthetic fibres
– Blends of various synthetic fibres
– Blends of synthetic and cotton fibres
– Recycled material
Use in any other way does not constitute proper,
intended use. Never use TC type cards for any
other purposes.
Definition of machine sides

The definition of the machine sides, "left" and
"right", are in line with the definitions for spinning
mill machines in DIN ISO 92. For machines with a
material flow in one direction, the machine sides
are defined looking against the direction of material
flow (arrow).
Example: The operating unit (1) is situated at the
back on the left-hand side of the housing.
Type plates
For exact identification of the machine, the card's
type plate (2) of the can be found on the bottom
machine frame behind the third door on the left-
hand side. You require this data for correspon-
dence with Trützschler's customer service in order
to be able to match individual components to the
machine. The type plate contains the following
data:
– Type designation
– Type number
– Commission number 2
– Year of manufacture
– CE mark
10 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Introduction
The type plate on the tuft feeder can be found

behind the third card door on the machine
frame (1).
The type plate with the electrical connection data is

in the control cabinet on the inside of the left-hand
door (2). This type plate contains the following
data:
– Operating voltage 3 phase AC
– Control voltage 1 phase AC
– Connected load
– Drawing number
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 11

Introduction
Safety measures
Organisational measures Avoiding machine damage

The machine has been built using state-of-the-art If you wish to increase production or the speed of
technology and in accordance with the recognised the main cylinder, you must adjust a series of gaps.
safety regulations. If used in an improper manner, Otherwise considerable damage will be caused to
however, the machine may pose a danger to the the card.
life and limb of the operator or of other persons,
The following gaps must be adjusted:
or machine functions may be impaired.
– between the licker-in unit and the main cylin-
The personnel employed to work on or with the
der
machine must have read and understood these
operating instructions before starting work. This – between the main cylinder and doffer
applies in particular to personnel who are only
– between the suction hoods and the main
required to work on the machine occasionally,
cylinder
e. g. for maintenance work.
– between the fixed flat and the main cylinder
The owner of the machine has the responsibility to
ensure that the machine is operated safely and – between the revolving flat and the main cylin-
does not present a hazard. He can achieve this der
through the following measures:
If you have any doubts, contact the Trützschler
– Ensuring that the operating instructions are after sales service department for details of how to
available on the machine at all times make adjustments.
– Carrying out regular training courses As the owner of the machine, you are responsible
for the following points:
– Regularly checking that personnel are paying
attention to safety and are aware of the haz- – Use the machine exclusively for applications
ards whilst working described as proper use.
– Observe the operating conditions and materi-
Safety of persons als for the machine described in these operat-
The personnel employed for operation and mainte- ing instructions.
nance must be qualified for their work or must have
– Observe the stipulated maintenance intervals.
been instructed by qualified persons.
– Use only original spare parts and process
Qualified persons are those with sufficient knowl-
media recommended by Trützschler.
edge of the machine as a result of their technical
training and experience. These persons are suffi-
ciently familiar with the relevant local and national
work safety and accident prevention regulations to
be able to assess the safe working condition of the
machine.
– Observe the working instructions for your
place of work.
– Observe the relevant accident prevention reg-
ulations.
– Observe the safety precautions contained in
these operating instructions.
12 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Introduction
Safety instructions
Read the following safety instructions carefully and Maintenance work
observe them at all times. They are given for your As owner of the machine, ensure that only qualified
own safety, for the safety of your colleagues and in personnel are employed to carry out maintenance
order to avoid any damage to the machine and the work on the machine.
attached components.
Install and activate all protective and safety instal-
Before switching on the machine lations correctly after all maintenance work.
As owner of the machine, ensure that only qualified Work on the machine going beyond the operations
personnel are employed to operate the machine. described in the chapter Maintenance may only be
carried out by Trützschler after-sales service per-
Also ensure that the machine is inspected by qual-
sonnel or by persons authorised by Trützschler.
ified personnel to make sure it is in a safe and haz-
ard-free condition before it is switched on for the Do not climb on the machine Only ever walk on lad-
first time, after maintenance work and after any ders, podiums or maintenance scaffolding provided
technical modifications. for this purpose.
As operator of the machine, ensure that you Do not start any set-up and maintenance opera-
request all persons in the danger area of the tions until the machine has been disconnected
machine to leave the area. from the power supply and has come to a standstill.
Secure the master switch with a padlock and put up
Electrical installation and control cabinet a warning sign or use other suitable means to pre-
Ensure that the doors to the control cabinet are vent the machine from being switched on without
kept locked at all times. The key should be kept by authorisation. This applies in particular for machine
a responsible and qualified person, e. g. the plant combinations and machines which cannot be mon-
electrician. itored in all areas at the same time due to their size.
Ensure that no liquids are allowed to penetrate into Carry out modifications to the machine or its com-
the control cabinet or other components. Should ponents only after consultation with Trützschler
this nevertheless happen, switch off the machine at after-sales service. Otherwise major malfunctions
the master switch, lock the switch to prevent unau- may occur causing serious personal injury and
thorised switching on and inform the responsible irreparable machine damage.
specialist personnel or the Trützschler after-sales
service department. Further instructions
If this machine is moved to another location or sold
to another company, these operating instructions
must accompany the machine. They are an integral
part of the machine.
Ensure that the floor around the machine is not
soiled with oil or grease after maintenance work.
Otherwise there is a risk of operators or other per-
sons slipping and suffering serious injuries.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 13

Introduction
Safety devices on the machine
3
2
Master switch Door safety mechanisms

The master switch (3) is used to switch the power Except for door (1), all doors are equipped with
supply to the machine ON (I) and to disconnect the electric safety switches. These locked doors can-
machine from the power supply (O). During main- not be opened while the machine is running.
tenance and setting work, you can lock the master
The feeder drive of the tuft feeder is disconnected
switch in the OFF position with a padlock to prevent
from the power supply by means of a safety switch
the machine being accidentally switched on.
if the rear maintenance flap is opened.
Emergency stop button
The card has an emergency stop push-button (2)
next to operating unit. The emergency stop works
on all motorised drives and pneumatic cylinders of
the card, of the tuft feeder and of the coiler or can
changer.
Press in the emergency stop button as far as it will
go in order to stop the machine in an emergency.
The drives are then braked with the maximum
deceleration and switched off. The machine can
only be switched on again if safety circuit is closed,
i.e. all the doors have been closed and the emer-
gency stop button has been released.
14 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Introduction
Symbols employed Conventions employed in

The following symbols are employed in these oper- these operating instructions
ating instructions:
Bold type
DANGER All text messages on the operating panel and des-
This symbol draws attention to a potential ignations of key pads are printed in bold type.
hazard for the operator that could result
in serious personal injury or even death. Italics
Cross-references to other sections of the text or
Caution other chapters are printed in italics.
This symbol draws attention to hazards
that could result in machine damage or References between text and pictures
data loss. Numbers shown in the text in brackets, e. g. (1),
refer to the numbers of items shown in the figures
Note on the same page.
This symbol draws attention to tips and
points of particular note that make opera- Operating steps
tion of the machine easier for you. Operating steps are marked as follows:
Every safety warning specifies the source of the 1. Open cover flap (1).
hazard, the potential hazard and the measures to
be taken to avoid the danger. 2. Set key switch to 0 and remove key.
3. Unscrew hexagon socket screw (2).
Buttons on the touch screen which you have to
press, are displayed in a special way:
1. Select the basic mask.
2. Start the machine.
Lists
Lists which are not sorted in any particular order
are shown as in the following example:
Pay attention to the following points:
– Remove any soiling.
– Check the tension of the belts.
– Replace any defective parts.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 15

Introduction
16 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Description
Description
This chapter familiarises you with the functions of In the process, any knots (neps) and residual soil-
the machine, the individual subassemblies and the ing is removed. At the outlet from the card, the fibre
operating elements. web is formed into a sliver which is placed into the
cans by a coiler.
Functions of the machine

The card is fed by the integrated tuft feeder with
Assembly groups
a uniformly compacted tuft mat - the feed sliver. The main assembly groups of the card are illus-
The card splits this feed sliver into individual fibres trated in the following schematic diagram.
and positions them parallel to each other.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 DIRECTFEED DFK tuft feeder 8 Doffer section

2 SENSOFEED integral tray 9 Web doffing section
3 WEBFEED licker-in unit
4 MULTI-WEBCLEAN system with fixed flats
5 Cylinder
6 Revolving flat system
7 MULTI-WEBCLEAN system with fixed flats
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 17

Description
DIRECTFEED tuft feeder

The tuft feeder forms an permanent integral part of 1
the card. The fibre material is drawn in by the open- 2
ing unit with a transport fan and fed to the tuft
feeder via a feed and distribution pipeline (2).
The air current is discharged through the exhaust
pipe (1). Air separation elements in the upper
trunk (3) make sure that the card is fed uniformly so
3
that a uniformly compacted web arrives at feed roll.
The material is clamped using the spring-mounted,
segmented tray (5) to ensure an optimum flow of
material across the entire width of the trunk.
The opening roll (6) makes sure the material is
opened uniformly. The fan (10) ensures that the 4
material is he material is compacted uniformly in
the specially designed lower trunk (7). The web
is formed between air outlet combs (9) and the 5
clamping point of the feed roll. The card's feed roll
(8) transfers the material into the SENSOFEED
integral tray. 6
10
7
18 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Description
SENSOFEED integral tray

On the TC 07 card the SENSOFEED integral tray
forms the connecting link between DIRECTFEED
DFK tuft feeder and WEBFEED licker-in unit. The 1
feed section consists of feed roll (5), spring-loaded
feed table (2) and ten spring elements (3) which
2
scan the web over its full width (CORRECTAFEED
ICFD).
3
The feed table compacts the tuft web and trans-
ports it to the spring elements. The deflections of all
ten spring elements are evaluated by the sensing
lever (1) and used to regulate the feed roll speed. 5 4
Metal particles or thick spots in the web are
detected and cause the card to come to an imme-
diate stop. With the aid of a reversing circuit, the
feed roll can be run in reverse so that foreign parts
can be removed before they cause damage to the
card.
The feed roll transports the material to the first
opening roll (4) on the downstream WEBFEED
licker-in unit.
EASYFEED feed tray

On the TC 06 card the EASYFEED tray compacts
the tuft web and feeds it to the transfer point. The 6
clamping point position can be adjusted to the sta-
ple length of the material fibres.
The web is compacted by the feed roll (8) and the
spring-mounted feed table (6) towards the clamp-
ing point and then opened by the opening roll (7).
The tray has a material feed monitoring system 7
8
which stops the card when a thick spot is detected.
Faulty material can be removed by using the
reversing function.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 19

Description
WEBFEED licker-in unit

The distance between the licker-in unit and the cleaning. When cleaning, any waste is taken on
main cylinder (6) is adjustable. The unit comprises and extracted by the suction hood (1).
the opening and cleaning rolls (3, 4 and 7) with two
The first roll (3) has needles or a clothing, depend-
carding segments (5 and 8). The mote knife (2) can
ing on the material to be processed, the following
be adjusted depending on the required level of
two rolls have clothings of special steel.
5
4 6
8 7
PMS-M blade adjustment system

The degree of cleaning can be set infinitely variably
using the lever (11) whilst the machine is running.
This adjusts the distance between the knife (10)
and the feed roll (9).
A motorised adjusting device is available as an
option.
10
11
20 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Description
The MULTI WEBCLEAN system and the revolving flats system

The MULTI WEBCLEAN system makes it possible The infinitely variable setting for the gap between
to use different carding, cleaning, control and cov- the flats system and the main cylinder can be
ering elements flexibly. The elements can be posi- adjusted using a lever (10). Alternatively, a
tioned in a wide variety of combinations, depending motorised adjustment system which is operated via
on requirements. the touch screen can be integrated.
The material delivered by the licker-in unit is The postcarding section (12) can also be equipped
received by the precarding section (items 1 to 5) flexibly with carding, cleaning and covering ele-
of the main cylinder and transported into the flats ments. The main cylinder transfers the parallel,
section. Carding takes place between the cylinder cleaned fibres to the clothing of the doffer roll (14).
clothing and the revolving flat which run in the
opposite direction.
6 7 8 9
10
5 11
4
12
3
1 13
14
1 Cover section (fixed arrangement) 11 Cleaning element (fixed arrangement)

2 Carding element (flexible arrangement) 12 Post-carding section with flexible element
arrangement
3 Cover section (flexible arrangement)
13 Cover section (fixed arrangement)
4 Cleaning element (flexible arrangement)
14 Doffer roll
5 Cleaning element (fixed arrangement)
6 2-roll flats cleaning device
7 Special toothed belt with cams for engage-
ment of the flats
8 Replaceable aluminium flats
9 Precision flexible bend with six final control-
ling elements
10 Precision flats adjustment system
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 21

Description
Doffer section
The clothing of the doffer roll (1) receives the fibres
from the main cylinder and forms the fibre web. The 3 4 6
5
stripping roll (2) then draws the web from the doffer
roll and transports it via guiding profile (9) to the two
squeezing rolls (4).
2
The cleaning roll (3) is covered with a flexible cloth-
ing and keeps the stripping roll clean.
1
Web doffing section
The web leaves squeezing rolls (4) and is brought
together in the opening of the web guiding bridge in
the WEBSPEED (5) that leads into web trumpet
(7). In the web trumpet, the web is formed into
the card sliver that is drawn out by the two delivery
rolls (6).
9 8 7
Sliver feed
The carded sliver (11) is fed from the card to the
coiler via two deflection rollers (10 and 12).
10 11 12
22 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Description
Options for sliver delivery

TC-CM manual coiler
The carded sliver (1) is threaded into the sliver
trumpet (3) by two guide rollers (2). The carded
1 2 3
sliver is fed through the coil plate by the delivery
rolls underneath the sliver trumpet. The can (4)
rotates during the filling procedure. The offset
rotary movements of the rotary can plate and the
coil plate deposits the carded sliver in a cycloid 4
pattern.
The weight of the deposited sliver automatically
lowers the can base. The control unit of the
upstream card determines the length of the carded
sliver.
You will find further information in the separate
operating instructions for the TC-CM coiler.
CCA automatic coiler
With an automatic CCA coiler, the turnstile (6)

pushes the full can out of the can filling position (5).
5
The sliver is severed automatically. At the same
time, an empty can is pushed from the standby
position into the can filling position. The centring
unit makes sure that the empty can is positioned
accurately. The filling procedure starts again. 6
This makes operation possible without any inter-
ruptions.
You will find further information on the CCA auto-
matic in the separate operating instructions.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 23

Description
The card's operating unit

The operating unit is used to set and monitor the
machine. All machine data and messages are dis-
played here. The operating unit consists of the
touch screen monitor (1), a combined display and
input panel, and the basic keys (2). The touch
screen monitor displays messages and diagrams
in the same way as a normal monitor. In addition,
inputs can be made and functions selected by
touching the displayed buttons.
If a button cannot currently be used, it is displayed
faded.
Automatic mode
Trützschler Card 1
Power BAE 4
Caution
Possible damage to the touch screen!
Only ever touch the buttons lightly with
your fingers. Do not bang or hit the touch
screen. Do not use any objects such as
pens or tools.
Touch the desired symbol lightly with the tip of your
finger. Depending on the button, a value will be
marked and selected or a function will be called up
and a new window is shown.
24 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Description
Basic mask
Automatic mode
Trützschler Card
Power BAE 4
1 Top row of buttons / display fields Basic keys (inch, stop, start)
2 Main section The basic keys (4) for machine control have the
following functions:
3 Bottom row of buttons / display fields
4 Basic keys for machine control
Operate card in jog mode
The main section of the screen (2) changes,
depending on the selected function. It displays
texts, diagrams and in some cases, buttons that Stop card
can be pressed. The top (1) and bottom (3) rows of
buttons and the display fields are valid for all
screen-filling displays. Start card
After a certain amount of time, the touch screen

switches off the background lighting without losing The operating unit also has additional lamps above
any data. Touch the touch screen once to reacti- the keys. The corresponding lamp lights up for as
vate it. After activating, it takes a short while before long as you press a key.
the touch screen can be operated again.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 25

Description
Power
The green power lamp shows when the operating
unit is switched on and active, even if the screen
saver is active and no display appears on the
screen. Touch the screen quickly to switch the dis-
play back on.
Inching key / inching mode

With each touch of the jog key you increase
the material conveyed. If you press and
hold the jog key, the material transport will
be continuously accelerated. When piecing up of
the sliver, the machine can be accelerated up to a
delivery speed of 100 m/min in jog mode.
The yellow inching mode lamp flashes if currently
only inching mode is available.
Stop key
You can stop the machine with this key.
Start key
If the green start lamp is flashing, you can
press the start key. Using this key, you start
the machine when it is ready for operation.
In most cases the inching key is also active when
the start lamp is flashing.
26 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Description
Basic mask, top rows
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
2
1 Automatic mode
Trützschler Card
No. Symbol Designation Function or significance

1 Window name Changes, depending on the function called up
2 Message line Machine status, warnings and fault messages
3 Language selec- Display: Current language as a flag symbol
tion and units of
Press button: Select language of the messages, select units of
measurement
measure for sliver count, length and weight
4 Operator Display: Current operator
management
Press button: Call up operator management, e. g. change opera-
tor
5 Machine status 1 Display: Current machine status
Press button: Call up log book
Further symbols for the machine status 1 are listed on page 28.
6 Machine status 2 Display: Current machine status
Press button: Display manufacturer information
Further symbols for machine status 2 are listed on page 28.
7 Information Display: Machine type
Press button: Display machine and manufacturer information and
the current programme version
8 Lot data Display: Current lot
Press button: Call up lot management, e. g. change lot name and
lot data
9 Date and time Display: Date and time
Press button: Set date and time
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 27

Description
Symbols for machine status Basic buttons

Depending on the status of the machine, one of the Apart from the buttons in the basic mask, a few
following symbols appears both status displays: other basic buttons are frequently used:
Machine status 1:
Button Functions
Symbol Meaning Accept, corresponds to "Enter" on a
The machine runs in automatic computer keyboard
mode Delete the character last entered
Machine not ready
Yes, confirm prompt or switch on
Machine ready for preparation function
No, refuse prompt or switch off
Machine ready function
Increase value, display next value,
Drives starting scroll up
Decrease value, display previous
Drives running value, scroll down
Abort current function
Drives slowing down
(Escape) Abort input without
Material transport ready for starting saving.
Delete selected or displayed data
Machine status 2:
Select the basic mask
Symbol Meaning
Display: Machine is running with no
current faults or warnings
Press button: Display manufacturer
information
Display: A maintenance interval
has elapsed
Press button: Display current warn-
ings and maintenance interval
Display: One of more warnings
have occurred
Press button: Call up window with
current warnings
Display: One of more faults have
occurred
Press button: Call up the first fault
message
Service mode
28 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Description
Basic mask, main area
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8
17
9
16
10
15
14 13 12 11

1 Carding gap (TC-PFS M only)
2 Flats speed
3 Efficiency
4 Current production volume per hour
5 CV Deviation of the sliver mass (cut length 3 cm)
6 D% Draft deviation
7 Fine adjustment Press button: Carry out fine adjustment
8 Machine Press button: Calibrate the three regulation and control circuits
balancing
9 Lot data Display: Current lot data (sliver count, delivery speed, total draft)
with the preset units of measure
Press button: Change lot data
10 Delivery speed to the can
11 Residual filling quantity of the can
12 Webspeed Open and close Webspeed
13 Cylinder drive Switch main cylinder drive on and off
14 Opening angle of the knife setting device on the 1st licker-in (TC-PMS M only)
15 Speed of first licker-in roll
16 Air pressure in the transfer trunk
17 Cylinder speed
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 29

Description
Basic mask, bottom row
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1a Standard level Display: Standard level selected;
Press button: Call up code input
1b Code level 1 Display: Code level 1;
Press button: Change code or exit code level
1c Code level 2 Display: Code level 2;
Press button: Change code or exit code level
2a Settings / Press button: Machine configuration, machine settings, lot data,
programming limit values, communication, service functions
2b Print function Press button: Data transmission via the serial interface or on
CompactFlash card (if available)
(only in certain lists, reports and windows)
3 Diagnostics Press button: Service functions, logbook, speeds, drafts,
sensors / measured values, maintenance
4 Quality / Press button: Lot, production and quality data, diagrams, cans
statistics and shift data
5 Can change Press button: Trigger manual can change
6 Page back Press button: Previous page, if available
7 Page forward Press button: Next page, if available
8 Basic mask Press button: Return to the basic mask
30 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Description
Selection lists
Selection lists are offered for numeric inputs when

the values exist only in predetermined steps.
When you press a value in the list (1), the value is
displayed above the list (2). Press the "accept" (8)
button to select the value.
4
3
Can diameter
5
2
No. Symbol Function or significance

1 Press the list value to highlight it
2 The current or newly highlighted value is displayed with the preset unit of measure-
ment
3 Designation of the input value
4 Scroll bar for navigation in long lists
5 Close the selection list without changing the current value or making a selection
6 Highlight previous value from the list
7 Highlight next value from the list
8 accept highlighted value
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 31

Description
Numeric inputs
Numeric values can be entered. These are then
automatically checked for validity.
4 5
DFK roll speed limit
3
6
2

1 Numerical keypad for entering numerical values
2a (3.00 … 7.00) Permissible values for this input variable
(3.00 … 7.00)
2b The entered value is outside the admissible range (red): Accept (9) or abort (5) the
input
3 The current value and unit of measurement is displayed as selected
4 Designation of the input value
5 Close the input window without changing the current value or delete the entered
figures and restore the old value
6 Delete the last figure
7 Scroll upwards through several list values
8 Scroll downwards through several list values
9 Check and accept the entered value
32 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Description
Text inputs
The text input window is used for entering the
names of operators and lots.
4
Operator name 5
1 7

1 The next letter is written in capitals
2 Current text or blank input line

3 Close the input window without changing the current text, or the entered text is
deleted and the old entry is displayed.
4 Designation of the text field
5 Delete the last letter
6 Keys for text input

7 Accept the entered text
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 33

Description
Messages
A message window is superimposed on the current

mask. New inputs can only be made once the win-
dow has been closed. There are four types of mes-
sage, all of which are described in the following.
The structure of fault messages and how to handle
them is described in the chapter Faults.
Symbol Message type Explanation Operator action
Wait This message appears only temporarily and dis- Wait

appears automatically. No inputs can be made
as long as the message is being displayed.
Query Confirm or reject the action to be carried out Yes No

(e. g. delete data).
Caution An important message is displayed and must be Confirm

confirmed by the operator.
Abort The aborting of an action must be confirmed by Confirm

the operator.
Example of a prompt:
Delete data?
Indicator lamp
The multi-coloured indicator lamp is located on the
top of the card housing and indicates the operating
statuses of the machine in the following way:
Signal colour Explanation Operating status
Green, constantly lit Production Machine is producing
Green, flashing Main cylinder speed has been achieved, Machine is ready for production
no fault
Yellow, flashing Can change Can is changed, machine continues

to produce
Yellow, constantly lit General warning during production Machine continues to produce
Red, constantly lit General fault Machine has stopped or switches

off
34 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Description
T-CON – Determining the effective carding gap

Function
On high-performance cards the carding gaps alter T-CON carding gaps [1/1000"]
during operation as a result of centrifugal force and 9 7.1 Reference
thermal expansion. The functional components and
the cylinder may come into contact if the basic set-
ting is selected to be too close or in case of extreme
16 11.1 12 7.3
external operating conditions.
– You can use the T-CON to read the current
10 5.0 10 4.4
carding gaps from the touch screen at any
time during production. T-CON Gap advice
– In case of contact between the functional ele-

ments and the cylinder clothing, the T-CON
switches off the card.
T-CON plates
The T-CON plates (1) are used to change the

carding gaps safely and absolutely. There are four
different T-CON plates which are labelled with the 1
numbers 2, 4, 6 and 8.
The number 6 plate is the default plate for the
MTT cassettes on the doffer side, the number
4 plate is the default plate for the MRR cassettes
on the licker-in side.
Example:
If you replace the number 6 plate with the number
4 plate, you reduced the carding gap by 2/1000".
The fastening screws (3) for the MTT cassettes (2)

have to be slightly unfastened in order to be able to 2
shift the desired T-CON plates (4) between the
extension (5) and the MTT cassette.
You will find more information on the T-CON start-

ing on page 43.
3
5 4
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 35

Description
36 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Operation
Operation
This chapter describes the fundamental operation Switching on the card
of the machine. All settings and modifications going
beyond the normal day-to-day operation of the Proceed as follows to prepare the machine for pro-
machine are described in the next chapter, duction:
Control settings, starting on page 51. 1. Check and carry out the following items as
The initial start-up with all the necessary basic set- necessary:
tings is carried out by the Trützschler after-sales – the material feed is switched on
service department. – empty cans are available
– all casing doors are closed
Caution 2. If necessary, remove the padlock from the
Possible serious damage to the machine! master switch.
After initial start-up of the card or after
replacing the flats clothing, the gap 3. Turn on the master switch.
between the flats and the main cylinder is 4. If the emergency stop button at the top left
set larger to account for the opening up of next to the operating unit has been pressed,
the flats clothing. This setting initially pull it back into the initial position.
causes the sliver quality to deteriorate.
Check the flats gap after a running-in 5. Switch on master switch (position I).
period and set it according to the values
which are entered in the Trützschler
setting log.
The setting work on the revolving flat are described ON
in the chapter Mechanical settings starting on
page 93. OFF OFF
Daily start-up
I 0
Before the daily start of operation, a few prepara-
tions and checks have to be carried out. These are
After a brief delay, the main mask appears on the
described below. When these have been carried
monitor of the operating unit and the machine is
out, you can begin production.
ready for operation.
Preparing the machine surroundings

Switching on after an emergency stop
Make sure to meet all prerequisites so that you can
switch on the machine. The machine is ready Caution
assembled, switched off and without material. Possible destruction of modules!
Make a visual inspection tour of the machine. It is imperative that you check why the
Look out for open doors, covers or flaps. emergency stop button has been
pressed. Arrange for any necessary
Clean off any dirt, tension loose belts or replace maintenance and repair work to be car-
damaged parts of basic functional elements as ried out.
described in the chapter Maintenance starting on
page 213.
Information on basic settings, the input of lot data
and lot changing can be found in the chapter
Control settings starting on page 51.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 37

Operation
Preparing and starting the machine

The computer starts, several routines are displayed
on the monitor before the basic mask appears.
1. Switch on the cylinder drive.
Machine ready
Trützschler Card
The main cylinder is the started. If you press the
button again, a prompt is displayed asking whether
you want to switch off the main cylinder again.
While the main cylinder is running up to speed,
a number of adjustments are made in order to
achieve the setpoints of the preset values.
For example, the flats adjustment system and the
blade adjustment system are positioned.
When all the adjustments have been successfully
completed, the following message appears:
Drives starting Power BAE 4
and then:
Material transport ready for starting
In order to convey the material from the delivery
rolls at starting speed:
2. Switch on material transport.
In order to transport the material into the doffer sec-

tion faster (up to 100 m/min) with the machine
empty:
3. Press and hold the jog key.
When you release the jog key, the material trans-

port goes back to starting speed.
38 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Operation
Piecing up
DANGER
Risk of serious crushing!
When the cover flap is open, long hair or
loose items of clothing may become
entangled in the rotating rolls.
Wear close-fitting clothing and keep it
buttoned and tucked in at all times. Staff
with long hair must wear a hair net. Do
not touch the rolls with your hand.
4. Remove the conveyed web from in front of the
delivery rolls.
5. Take the half of the web from the lower

squeezing roll and rub it backwards and for-
wards between your hands to form a point.
6. Thread the web into the WEBSPEED funnel.

7. Produce a few metres of sliver.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 39

Operation
8. Place the sliver over the first deflection

roller (1) and guide it over the second deflec-
1 2
tion roller (2) to the can changer.
The machine then switches to Automatic mode –
the WEBSPEED is closed automatically and the
machine accelerates to production speed.
9. Check all the information displayed in the

basic mask and correct using the machine
Automatic mode
balancing, if necessary (see page 67). Trützschler Card
40 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Operation
Changing operators
When you take over the machine, for example dur-
ing a shift change, log in using the operator
change. The production data is now continuously
updated under your name until the next operator
change takes place.
1. Select operator management.
2. Highlight the new operator.

Smith
3. Accept.
After changing the operator, the corresponding

operator symbol is displayed in the top line of the
basic mask. For detailed information on operator
management, see page 53.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 41

Operation
Dealing with faults

If a fault occurs, the red "fault" symbol (1) appears
in the upper row of keys and a fault message win- 1
dow is displayed. Proceed as follows in the event of
any faults:
Note E0141 Sliver break
When a fault has occurred, symbol (2)

appears in grey and you cannot acknowl-
edge the fault. When the fault has been
remedied, the symbol changes to red and
the fault can then be acknowledged.
1. With the help of the fault message, localise
and remedy the fault.
2. Acknowledge the fault with
button (2).
3. Start the card again.
2
If a fault message is displayed and a button outside
the fault message window is pressed, the fault
message will disappear. However, the fault has not
yet been acknowledged. In this case, press the
"fault message" button (1) in the top row of buttons
again to display the fault message once more.
The fault can then be remedied and acknowledged
in the fault message window with button (2).
You will find more information starting on page 183.
42 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Operation
Can change
The card is fitted with a manual coiler as standard. Automatic can change
The card is can optionally be fitted with a fully auto-
Initiating manual can change matic can changer which has its own drive and no
1. If there is a full can in the can changer, mechanical link to the card.
remove it. The can change is triggered by the coiler based on
2. Push an empty can into the can changer. the filling level in the can and the sliver length.
The card runs at reduced delivery speed during the
3. Trigger the can change can change. On completion of the can change, the
card runs up to production speed again automati-
cally. The yellow indicator lamp flashes during the
The speed of the material transport is then reduced can change.
to can change speed and a can change is carried During a can change, the carded sliver is severed
out. After the can change, the material transport is in the drafting system by an artificially created thin
automatically accelerated to production speed spot. The changer drive moves the full can out of
again. the filling position and an empty can into the filling
position.
You can also carry out a manual can change with
the automatic can changer.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 43

Operation
Optimising the carding gap with T-CON
T-CON in normal mode

You will find more information on the T-CON on
page 88.
The T-CON carding gaps [1/1000''] window
shows the set values and current carding gaps in
1/1000'' at five points around the cylinder. Values Automatic mode
shown on a grey background are the settings. T-CON carding gaps [1/1000"]
Values with a white background are the current 9 7.1 Reference

carding gap dimensions.
1. Press the white display fields to show the
changes in the respective carding gap as a 16 11.1 12 7.3
graph (see page 45).

10 5.0 10 4.4
T-CON Gap advice
The symbol in the middle of the illustration of the

cylinder can be yellow of green:
T-CON contact monitoring switched off
– yellow: T-CON is inactive T-CON carding gaps [1/1000"]
– green: T-CON is active 9 7.1 Reference
16 11.1 12 7.3
10 5.0 10 4.4
T-CON Gap advice
If you wish to compare the absolute temperatures

with each other, you can scroll forwards once in
order to compare all reference temperatures with Material transport ready for starting
a grey background (with reference date and time) Temperature measuring T-CON
with the current measured temperatures with a

Reference Temperature
white background in the Temperature measuring
Ambient temp.
T-CON window opposite.
Main cylinder
Lateral shield
T-CON reference
44 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Operation
You can show a more detailed view of the gap

changes by pressing the magnifying glass symbol. 1 2
The x axis of the diagram then shows the last
24 hours (h) instead of a period of days (d). See the
figure on the right. Machine ready
– Vertical white lines in the diagram mark points T-CON cylinder/MTT (doffer side)
at which the card has been switched off at the Contact [s]
master switch, and thus also the end of data

recording. After the card is switched back on,
the data recording starts directly from the Gap [1/1000"]
white line.
– The vertical red line (1) shows the limit con-
tact duration in seconds.
– The purple line (2) shows the setting for this
carding gap. You can change this value using
the button opposite.
– Contacts are shown by the progress of the 4 3
blue curve (3).
– The yellow line (4) shows the current carding
gap.
The smallest carding gap reached for this measur-
ing point with the corresponding date stamp is
displayed in the white display field on the right.
The value remains in place until the next change to
the set carding gap or until the next referencing
process.
There is a lower limit for the current carding gap
below which the current carding gap values are
shown in yellow (see figure). Carding gap too small: MTT doffer side
T-CON carding gaps [1/1000"]
You are shown the appropriate warning informing
9 7.1 Reference
you that a certain carding gap is below the permit-
ted limit and the card can no longer be operated
reliably. The permitted limits are set especially for
16 11.1 12 2.8
each of the five measuring points.
If the carding element and the cylinder clothing
10 5.0 10 4.4
come into contact, a fault message is displayed
and the card is stopped. T-CON Gap advice
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 45

Operation
T-CON flow chart
Machine is cold
Insert T-CON plates and set the carding

gaps with a gauge*)
Reference
Change other settings,
e. g. the speed
Enter the settings in the numerical fields

on the touch screen
Start production
- Material transport stop

- Cylinder stop
Observe the current gaps on the display Make settings by replacing
screen and stop production in case of a the T-CON plates
too narrow carding gap
Set the licker-in and doffer
with a gauge whilst the
machine is cold
Machine is warm Adjust the flat pin settings
with the aid of the PFS
Activate the T-CON gap recommendation
Select the material to be processed
Can the
recommendations in the yes
blue fields on the touch screen
be applied usefully?
no
Check the sliver quality
Produce
*) Set according to the setting plan in the operating instructions during initial start-up
The individual steps are described in detail on the
following pages.
46 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Operation
T-CON Gap advice

You can improve the carding performance by
changing the carding gap. The carding gap set
whilst the machine is cold is not relevant to the
quality of the sliver, but rather the carding gap 1
under production conditions whilst the machine is
warm. T-CON helps you determine this optimised
carding gap with a recommended setting on the Automatic mode
touch screen. T-CON Gap advice
Reference
Once you have ensured smooth operation by fol- 9 6.5
lowing the setting instructions in the operating

instructions, you can start to think about optimisa-
tion. 16 10.2 12 6.8
Absolute and relative dimensions 10 5.3 10 4.3
The values in the five grey fields (1) on the touch

T-CON Gap advice
screen show the absolute carding gaps in 1/1000",
as set whilst the machine was cold.
The difference between one T-CON plate and the
next T-CON plate is 2/1000". The numbers on the
T-CON plates are purely for identification purposes
and are not dimensions.
Colour coding of T-CON plates:
T-CON 2 – red
T-CON 4 – yellow
T-CON 6 – green
T-CON 8 – blue
Caution
Risk of serious damage to the machine!
Change the settings very carefully.
Only optimise the carding gaps with con-
tact measurement switched on.
Do not attempt to optimise a "T-CON
master card" and transfer the setting
values to other cards.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 47

Operation
Implementing the gap recommendation

The current temperature status of the card is
shown by the display (1). When the card is warm, 1
the T-CON Gap advice button (2) is displayed.
– Cold machine: Arrow is on the left in the blue Automatic mode
area T-CON Gap advice
9 6.5 Reference
– Neither cold nor warm: Double arrow in the
middle
– Warm machine: Arrow is on the right in the 16 10.2 12 6.8
red area (1)
10 5.3 10 4.3
1. Press the T-CON Gap advice button (2). T-CON Gap advice
The displayed blue fields (3) are empty.

3 4
2. Press the Select material button (4).
3. Select the material being used in the dis-
played window: Automatic mode
T-CON Gap advice cotton
– 100 % cotton or
narrower
– 100 % polyester or further 9 6.5 Select material
– 100 % viscose
– other
16 10.2 12 6.8
10 5.3 10 4.3
After selecting the material, the page opposite, with

optimisation suggestions, is displayed. The values
in the blue fields (5) are suggestions for changes to Automatic mode
the carding gap at the respective point: T-CON Gap advice cotton
narrower
-1 9 6.5 Select material
further
– Positive values stand for an increase of the
carding gap.
– Negative values stand for a reduction of the 0 16 10.2 -2 12 6.8
carding gap.
0 10 5.3 0 10 4.3
48 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Operation
4. Stop the material transport and cylinder.

5. Set to the recommended values by replacing
the T-CON plates.
6. Set the licker-in and doffer as recommended
with a gauge whilst the machine is cold
(see information starting on page 116).
7. Adjust the carding gap of the flats pins
using the PFS flats adjustment system
(see page 70).
8. Start up the material transport again.
Checking the settings

1. Press the T-CON Gap advice button.
Automatic mode
The recommendations for optimisation of the card- T-CON Gap advice cotton
narrower
ing gap in the blue fields (1) should all be at "0". further 0 8 5.3 Select material
0 16 9.9 0 10 4.6
0 10 5.1 0 10 4.2
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 49

Operation
Switching off the card

Before carrying out cleaning work or changing set- 8. Leave the main cylinder motor running for
tings, the card must be completely emptied of all approximately 10 minutes so that the flats can
material and then switched off. be cleaned by the cleaning rolls, then:
If you also wish to empty the trunk of the DFK tuft 9. Switch off the main cylinder
feeder, you must also switch off the material feed to drive.
the tuft feeder.
Caution Note
Danger of damage to the clothings and A safety check question is displayed to
other components possible! prevent the main cylinder being acciden-
If the card is to be switched off for several tally switched off.
days, ensure that all material has been The main cylinder drive is switched off and the
removed from the card before switching green bar of the button "main drive" disappears.
off. Moisture can cause any material left
in the machine to stick or form lumps. 10. Switch off master switch (position O).
This can then cause serious damage to 11. Before carrying out cleaning or maintenance
the machine when the card is switched work, lock the master switch in the off position
on again. with a padlock to prevent unauthorised
Switch off the material feed to the DFK tuft feeder restarting.
as follows:
1. Call up Settings / program-

ming.
2. Select Service functions.
3. Select DFK active.
4. Switching off the DFK.
5. Leave the material transport running until

there is no more material appears between
the delivery rolls.
6. The material transport either switches off
automatically, or you switch off the material
transport by pressing a button:
7. Switch off the material trans-

port.
50 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Control settings
Control settings
This chapter describes all settings for controlling Basic settings
the card.
The basic settings include functions which you can
Caution call up using buttons in the basic mask:
Risk of damage to assembly groups and – Code levels,
production faults!
Incorrect settings can interfere with the – national language, units of weight and length
production process and lead to extensive – Date and time,
repairs and settings.
Settings must be changed by properly – Operator management and the
trained, specialist personnel only. – Lot management
The order of the settings is determined by the order
of the menu commands in the touch screen menus. Code levels
In the chapter Description you will find basic infor- The machine settings are protected by different
mation on the touch screen and how to operate it. code levels. Basic settings can only be changed if
you switch the machine to code level 1 or 2. You
If you are looking for a particular function, refer to either enter the respective code when prompted or
the Index at the end of these operating instructions. you switch the code level as described in the fol-
The starting point for each of the sequences of but- lowing.
tons described is the basic mask. The functions are
displayed as symbols on the buttons. Menus, menu Note
commands and window names on the touch This symbol appears if the incorrect code
screen are shown in bold type. has been entered.
Example: Selecting standard level

1. Select the basic mask. At standard level you can only view most of the val-
ues and carry out "normal" operation of the
machine. The machine is locked to prevent
2. Select Quality / Statistic. changes to settings.
1. Select code from code level 1

or 2.
2. Activate standard level.
Code level 1
If you want to change values, e. g. the lot data, you
must first enable code level 1 using a 4 digit code.
1. Enter four-digit code in stan-

dard level.
2. Accept.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 51

Control settings
Code level 2 Language and units

If you want to make basic machine settings, you You can select the basic settings for messages and
must first enable code level 2 using the five digit display values on the touch screen here.
code.
Selecting the language
1. Enter five-digit code in stan-
dard level. There are different languages available for the
messages on the operating unit: Select one of the
2. Accept. available languages as follows:
1. Select Language selection

and units.
Changing the code
In code level 2, you can change codes 1 and 2. 2. Select the language.
In code level 1 you can only change code 1.
1. Select code from code level 1 3. Accept.

or 2.
2. Enter code 1 or 2 again. Selecting the unit for the sliver count
The units for sliver count and sliver weight are:
3. Accept, enter new code once ktex, Nm, Ne or gr/yd.
more.
1. Select Language selection
4. Accept. and units.
2. Select the unit for the sliver
count.
Resetting codes to default values
If a code has been changed unintentionally or is not 3. Accept.
known, you can reset both codes to the default val-
ues. The default value for code level 1 is "1234".
The default value for code level 2 is "12345". Selecting units of measurement
If the machine is already in the standard level, Chose between metric and imperial units of mea-
begin with step 3. surement: Metres (m) und kilometres (km) or yards
(yd) und miles (mi) for lengths. Information on
1. Select code input from code speed is issued accordingly in m/min or y/min.
level 1 or 2. Weights are shown in pounds (lbs) or kilograms
(kg).
2. Activate standard level. 1. Select Language selection

and units.
3. Select standard level 2. Select the units for length and
code input and enter reset weights.
code 753951.
3. Accept.
4. Confirm query Reset codes.
5. Accept.
52 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Control settings
Date and time

The date and time affects functions such as the
"log book" or "shift data". You cannot change the
data and time here when using external shift man-
agement with a KIT system.
1. Select Date and time.
2. Use the arrow keys to set the

day, month and year and
hours, minutes and seconds.
3. Accept.
Operator management
Using operator management, you can change the
active operator, create and edit operators and view
or delete their production data.
3 Operator management 4
5
2
Smith
1
Miller 6
Cohen
7
1 Occupied operator slot

2 Free operator slot
3 Active operator
4 Delete the active operator's production data
5 Active operator's production data
6 Name or rename operator
7 Accept
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 53

Control settings
Changing operators
When you take over the machine, for example dur-
4. Accept.
ing a shift change, log in using the operator
change. The production data is now continuously
updated under your name until the next operator 5. If desired, change over to the
change takes place. changed operator.
1. Select Operator manage-

Deleting an operator's production data
ment.
You can reset an operator's production data (dura-
2. Highlight the new operator. tion of production, weight produced, length pro-
Smith
duced) to 0.
3. Accept. 1. Select Operator manage-
ment.
2. Highlight the operator.
After changing the operator, the corresponding Smith
operator symbol is displayed in the top line of the
basic mask. 3. Delete the marked operator's
production data.
Entering a new operator
4. Confirm the prompt Delete
A new or additional operator for the card must be
data?.
entered in operator management. This is the only
way to record the new operator's production data. 5. Accept.
ment.
Deleting an operator name
2. Highlight a free operator slot.
You can delete an operator name as follows.

3. Select the keypad and enter
ment.
the operator name.
2. Highlight the operator name to
4. Accept name. Smith
be deleted.
3. Select keyboard.
5. If desired, change over to the
new operator.
4. Delete the characters in the
The operator name which has been entered name displayed one by one.
appears next to the coloured operator symbol.
5. Accept.
Changing an operator name
Select and change an existing operator name. 6. Accept.

ment.
2. Highlight the existing operator.
Smith
3. Select the keypad and change

or delete the name.
54 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Control settings
Lot management
3 Lot management 4
Cotton 2
5
2 6
Cotton 3
7
1
8
The data which leads to optimum production data 1 Free lot ---
and quality data for a particular type of material are
2 Active lot (yellow), contains the current lot
stored in a lot. The lot data concerns the mechani-
data of the machine (working memory)
cal, electrical and electronic machine settings and
the functions of the machine control system (soft- 3 Selected lot (white) for following options:
ware). You an only change lot data in an active lot. Copy (4), paste (5), delete (6), change
colour (7), rename (8), activate (9)
If lot data becomes invalid (e. g. due to a program
If you press the selected lot (3) once more,
change), it is marked in magenta and can now only
the data from this lot will be displayed.
be deleted.
4 Copy selected lot to intermediate memory
5 Fill or overwrite selected lot slot with the data
from the intermediate memory
6 Delete the name and data of the selected lot
7 Colour-code the selected lot
8 Name or rename the selected lot
9 Lot change Activate selected lot
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 55

Control settings
Displaying a lot Creating a new lot

You can display the data from any lot: A new lot can be created (copied) using an old lot
as the basis; there are no empty lots. Select a suit-
1. Select Lot management. able lot as the template:
1. Select Lot management.

2. Select a lot.
Cot 55
2. Select a lot as a template.

3. Display Overview lot data. Cot 55
Cot 55
3. Copy the lot data.

If you wish to change the lot data, you must first
select the lot as the active lot (lot change). You can 4. Select the target for the new
then change the data. ---
lot; the button is displayed
with a white backdrop.
Selecting a lot
5. Paste the lot data to the
If you wish to use an existing lot, proceed as fol-
selected lot memory.
lows:
6. Confirm overwrite as neces-
sary.
7. Enter the name for the new
2. Highlight the desired lot.
Cot 55 lot.
8. Accept name.
3. Accept.
9. Select the colour for the lot

The name of the selected lot is displayed along symbol.
with the coloured lot symbol in the top right of the 10. Accept.
basic mask.
Renaming a lot
Change the name of an existing lot as follows:
2. Select a lot.
Cot 55
3. Change the name of a lot.
4. Accept name.
56 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Control settings
Changing the lot colour

You can select the background colour for a lot item: Programme change / programme version
Existing lot data which is not compatible with the
new software may become invalid when updating
the control software. Display and make a note of all
2. Select a lot. important data in lot management before a pro-
Cot 55 gram change. If you have a connection to an exter-
nal PC or printer, you can output the data by press-
3. Select the colour for the new ing the printer symbol on the touch screen.
lot.
You must generate this lot data again and also re-
4. Accept colour. balance the machine.
Deleting a lot
2. Select the lot to be deleted.

Cot 55
3. Delete the lot.
4. Confirm the prompt Delete

data?.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 57

Control settings
Machine configuration
In machine configuration you communicate to the Card feeding device
system which machine components and which Select the feeding system which is installed in your
equipment options are available in your card instal- card. The TC 07 is fitted with the SENSOFEED
lation. feeding system as standard. The TC 06 is fitted
with the EASYFEED as standard.
Main drive
Select whether the main drive is fitted with a fre- 1. Select Settings / program-
quency converter (FC) or select the appropriate ming.
mains frequency for your local mains power supply. 2. Select Machine configura-
tion.
1. Select Settings / program-
ming. 3. Scroll to Card feeding
device.
2. Select Machine configura-
tion. 4. Press Card feeding device
and select the installed feed-
3. Press Main drive and select
ing system from the list.
the appropriate value.
T-CON
Sliver deposit system
Communicate to the system whether or not you
Communicate to the system which sliver deposit
wish to activate the T-CON carding gap optimisa-
system is installed. This setting is displayed auto-
tion.
matically when starting up for the first time.
ming.
ming.
tion.
tion.
3. Scroll to T-CON.
3. Press Sliver deposit system
and select the installed system
from the list. 4. Select T-CON.
Can diameter 5. Select to activate T-CON.

Select the appropriate can diameter for the
installed coiler or can changer. Select to deactivate T-CON.
ming.
tion.
3. Press Can diameter and
select the appropriate value.
58 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Control settings
PFS-M flats adjustment Filter box

Communicate to the system whether or not Communicate to the system whether or not the
motorised PFS-M flats adjustment is installed. card is fitted with a separate filter box.
1. Select Settings / program- 1. Select Settings / program-

ming. ming.
2. Select Machine configura- 2. Select Machine configura-
tion. tion.
3. Scroll to Flats adjustment 3. Scroll to Filter box.
system PFS-M.
4. Select Flats adjustment 4. Select Filter box.
system PFS-M.
5. Select if the PFS-M is avail- 5. Select if a separate filter box is
able. installed.
Select if the PFS-M is not Select if a separate filter box is
available. not installed.
PMS-M blade adjustment system Separate flat strips suction

Communicate to the system whether or not Communicate to the system whether or not sepa-
motorised PMS-M blade adjustment is installed on rate flat strips suction is installed.
the first opening roll of the WEBFEED unit.
1. Select Settings / programming.
ming.
2. Select Machine configuration.
tion.
3. Scroll to Separate flat strips
3. Scroll to Blade adjustment suction.
PMS-M.
4. Select Separate flat strips
4. Select Blade adjustment suction.
PMS-M.
5. Select if separate flat strips
5. Select if the PMS-M is avail- suction is available.
able.
Select if separate flat strips
Select if the PMS-M is not suction is not available.
available.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 59

Control settings
Fan MTT
Communicate to the control system whether or not
4. Select Webfeed Plus.
an MTT fan is installed.
1. Select Settings / program- 5. Select if the Webfeed Plus is

ming. available.
2. Select Machine configura- Select if the Webfeed Plus is
tion. not available.
3. Scroll to Fan MTT.
Servo drive type depositing system
4. Select Fan MTT. This setting is displayed automatically when start-
ing up for the first time. Communicate to the system
which drive is installed in the coiler for the coiling
5. Select if an MTT fan is plate.
installed.
Select if an MTT fan is not ming.
installed.
tion.
DFK slide valve
3. Scroll to Deposit servo drive
Communicate to the system whether or not the
type.
DFK tuft feeder is fitted with a slide valve.
4. Press Deposit servo drive
1. Select Settings / program- type and select the appropri-
ming. ate motor number.
tion. Continuous suction
3. Scroll to DFK slide valve. Communicate to the system whether or not contin-
ual suction is installed.
4. Select DFK slide valve. 1. Select Settings / program-
ming.
5. Select if a slide valve is 2. Select Machine configura-
installed. tion.
Select if a slide valve is not 3. Scroll to Continuous suction.
installed.
4. Select Continuous suction.

WEBFEED Plus
Communicate to the system whether or not the
optional WEBFEED Plus opener package is 5. Select if continuous suction is
installed. available.
Select if continual suction is
1. Select Settings / program- not available.
ming.
tion.
3. Scroll to Webfeed Plus.
60 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Control settings
Machine settings
In machine settings you set speeds, distances, DFK roll speed limit
intervals and other parameters for the forming of It is here where you set the minimum speed of the
slivers. opening roll of the DIRECTFEED DFK tuft feeder.
If the speed drops below this value, the card
Pulley diameter for switches off and a fault message is issued.
You must set which belt pulleys are fitted to the
drive groups of the card in the machine control sys-
ming.
tem. This is the only way in which the system can
correctly display and check speeds. The diameter 2. Select Machine settings.
is marked on each pulley.
1. Select Settings / program- 3. Scroll to DFK roll speed limit.

ming.
2. Select Machine settings. 4. Select DFK roll speed limit
and enter a speed.
5. Accept.
A schematic top view plan of all belt pulleys is then
displayed. The replaceable belt pulleys are num-
bered. You can select the appropriate pulley diam-
eter for each numbered belt pulley from the list. Webspeed OPEN
3. Press the corresponding but- You can open the WEBSPEED sliver former during
ton and select the appropriate production in order to remove web samples or to
pulley diameter from the list. inspect the web visually.
With this setting, you determine at which speed
the machine should operate when you open the
WEBSPEED sliver former.

ming.
2. Select Machine settings.
3. Scroll to Webspeed OPEN.
4. Select Webspeed OPEN and

enter a speed.
5. Accept.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 61

Control settings
Blade cleaning Sliver cutter

With this setting you set after how many minutes It is here where you define how much time elapses
the squeezing roll blades should be raised and before the sliver separator is activated after the
blown through in order to remove material depos- turnstile has started to turn.
its.
1. Select Settings / programming.
ming.
3. Scroll to Sliver cutter.
3. Scroll to Blade cleaning.
4. Select Sliver cutter and enter
4. Select Blade cleaning and a period of time in minutes.
enter a period of time.
5. Accept.
5. Accept.
Lower can changing speed for

Can monitoring This is where you enter the value by which the
With this setting you can define whether a warning production speed is reduced for a can change.
message is issued in the following situations: You can enter values from 0 ... 30 m/min.
– if there is no empty can available in the can 1. Select Settings / program-
changer or ming.
– if the filled can has not been removed from 2. Select Machine settings.
the can changer.
Define which length of sliver contained in the cur-
3. Scroll to Lower can changing
rent can should cause the indicator lamps to flash
speed for.
and a warning to appear on the screen. When mak-
ing this setting pay attention to the intended deliv- 4. Select Lower can changing
ery speed. speed for and enter value.
1. Select Settings / program- 5. Accept.
ming.
3. Scroll to Can monitoring.
4. Select Can monitoring and

enter a length.
5. Accept.
62 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Control settings
Web thickness tolerance Suction pressure too low – cylinder off

The tuft web is compacted in the SENSOFEED You can set whether the cylinder is switched off
integral tray by a feed plate and fed to the ten below a certain level of suction pressure to prevent
spring elements of the sensing lever. With this set- the card from overheating.
ting you determine how far the spring elements
should be allowed to be pushed apart by the mate- Caution
rial beyond the calibration value. The material Risk of blockage in the suction hoods!
transport is switched off once the sum of the cali- If the suction pressure is too low, the
bration value and tolerance value is reached. material is not extracted at a quick
enough rate; as a result the machine
1. Select Settings / program- overheats.
ming.
2. Select Machine settings. ming.
3. Scroll to Web thickness
tolerance.
3. Scroll to Suction pressure
4. Select Web thickness toler- too low – cylinder off.
ance and enter the limit value
for the excursion. 4. Select Suction pressure too
low – cylinder off.
5. Accept.
5. Select to switch the cylinder off
if the suction pressure is too
low.
Select if the cylinder should
not be switched off when the
suction pressure is too low.
6. Accept.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 63

Control settings
Quality error acknowledge only with Fan MTT active

code If your card is fitted with the additional MTT fan and
With this setting you can determine whether users you have communicated this to the control system
of the system have to enter a code in order to using the menu path Settings / programming –
acknowledge any quality faults detected. Machine configuration – Fan MTT, at this point
you can switch the fan on or off (see also page 60).
One example for use is the changeover to a new
ming.
material during a lot change if the new material
2. Select Machine settings. does not require an additional fan.

3. Scroll to Quality error ming.
acknowledge only with
code. 2. Select Machine settings.
4. Select Quality error

acknowledge only with 3. Scroll to Fan MTT active.
code.
5. Select to only allow acknowl- 4. Select Fan MTT active.
edgement after input of a
code.
5. Activate the MTT fan.
Select to allow acknowledge-
ment without input of a code.
Deactivate the MTT fan.
6. Accept.
6. Accept.
Thick spots monitoring

This is where you can activate thick spots monitor-
ing.

ming.
3. Scroll to Thick spots moni-

toring.
4. Select Thick spots monitor-
ing.
5. Activate thick spots monitor-
ing.
Deactivate thick spots moni-
toring.
6. Accept.
64 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Control settings
Lot data
The lot data encompasses a number of production DFK target pressure
parameters for the card which you can combine to Using this setting, you can set the pressure in the
suit the material. On delivery of the card, a default lower trunk of the DIRECTFEED DFK tuft feeder.
data set which serves as the basis for further lot
data is already stored in the system. 1. Select Settings / program-
You always establish the lot data in a series of trials ming.
depending on the machine configuration and the 2. Select Lot data.
material to be processed. Once you have achieved
a satisfying result, you can save the parameters
you have established as a lot under an instantly 3. Select DFK target pressure
recognisable name and call them up as required. and enter value.
4. Accept.
Sliver count
This setting is used to specify the sliver count at the
output measuring funnel.
Draft
1. Select Settings / program- Using this setting, you set the draft which you
ming. require to achieve the necessary sliver count.
2. Select Lot data. 1. Select Settings / program-
ming.
3. Select Sliver count and enter 2. Select Lot data.
value.
4. Accept. 3. Select Draft and enter value.
4. Accept.
Delivery speed
You can set the delivery speed of the belt to the
coiler or the can changer as follows:

ming.
2. Select Lot data.
3. Select Delivery speed and

enter value.
4. Accept.
Note
On machines with the transverse web
delivery option, the delivery speed must
not exceed 280 m/min.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 65

Control settings
Draft V4 Card – coiler tension

This is where you set the draft between the card's
Note delivery rolls and the coiler. The ideal draft is
On machines with just one motor on the achieved when the sliver hangs in the middle of the
delivery unit, you set draft V4 by chang- light barrier bar. The value serves as the setpoint
ing the drive wheel (see page 111). for long-term loop control by the light barrier bar.
Minimum draft V4 1. Select Settings / program-

When piecing up the sliver the machine is operated ming.
at a low delivery speed. Draft V4 must therefore 2. Select Lot data.
also be reduced so that the sliver does not tear.
With this setting you define the minimum V4 draft
3. Scroll to Card coiler tension.
which should be effected between the squeezing
rolls and the delivery rolls in order to piece up the
sliver at slow speed. 4. Select Card coiler tension
and enter value.
ming. 5. Accept.
2. Select Lot data.
Starting speed
3. Select Minimum draft V4 and
enter value. This is where you define at which speed the mate-
rial is to be delivered when piecing up.
4. Accept.
ming.
Maximum draft V4 2. Select Lot data.
With this setting you define the maximum V4 draft
which should be effected between the squeezing
3. Scroll to Starting speed.
rolls and the delivers rolls at maximum delivery
speed.
The optimum draft has been achieved if the triangle 4. Select Starting speed and
of web brought together in the funnel does not flut- enter value.
ter and does not tear. 5. Accept.
ming.
2. Select Lot data.
3. Select Maximum draft V4 and

enter value.
4. Accept.
66 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Control settings
Slow speed Can filling quantity

When faults occur – e. g. in the blow room – the This is where you determine how many metres of
transport speed is reduced to slow speed for a sliver should be delivered into the can before a can
certain period before being switched off com- change is triggered. The length of the sliver
pletely. If the fault is remedied and acknowledged depends on the material and the size of the can.
within this period, the material transport returns to
production speed again. With this setting you 1. Select Settings / program-
define the speed of slow speed. ming.
1. Select Settings / program- 2. Select Lot data.

ming.
2. Select Lot data. 3. Scroll to Can filling.
3. Scroll to Slow speed. 4. Select Can filling and enter

the sliver length.
4. Select Slow speed and enter 5. Accept.

a speed.
5. Accept.
Rotary can plate drive
This is where you determine whether the sliver is to
be placed in the can loosely or compact. Make set-
Can change speed tings which are suited the material being produced.
When a can change is due, the delivery speed of
the card is reduced so that the can change can be 1. Select Settings / program-
carried out. ming.
The can changing speed is determined by the 2. Select Lot data.
sliver break which depends on the material. The
sliver must not be allowed to reach the floor during
the can changing process. 3. Scroll to Rotary can plate
drive.
Establish the optimum sliver break for your material
and set how high the delivery speed should be dur- 4. Select Rotary can plate drive
ing the can changing process. and enter a percentage.
1. Select Settings / program- 5. Accept.
ming.
2. Select Lot data.
3. Scroll to Can changing

speed.
4. Select Can changing speed
and enter a speed.
5. Accept.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 67

Control settings
Flats speed If you have any doubts, contact the Trützschler

With this setting you define the speed of the after sales service department for details of how to
revolving flat. make adjustments.

ming.
ming.
2. Select Lot data.
2. Select Lot data.
3. Scroll to Cylinder speed.

3. Scroll to Flats speed.
4. Select Cylinder speed and

4. Select Flats speed and enter
enter a speed.
speed.
5. Accept.
5. Accept.
Main cylinder speed Speed Licker in 1

If the licker-in's drive motor is fitted with a fre-
If the cylinder's drive motor is fitted with a fre-
quency converter, you can use this setting to adjust
quency converter, you can use this setting to adjust
the cylinder speed infinitely variably. The speed
the cylinder speed infinitely variably. The speed
range available depends on the belt pulley which is
range available depends on the belt pulley which is
fitted.
fitted.
Caution ming.
Possible serious damage to the card!
When you increase the speed of the main 2. Select Lot data.
cylinder, the temperature of the rolls and
clothings which convey material also
increases. The resultant expansion can 3. Scroll to Speed Licker in 1.
cause gaps to reduce in size and clothing
needles may come into contact with each 4. Select Speed Licker in 1 and
other and be destroyed. To avoid dam- enter a speed.
ages, you must adjust a number of spac-
ings accordingly: 5. Accept.
– between the main cylinder and doffer
– between the suction hoods and the main
cylinder
– between the fixed flat and the main cylinder
– between the revolving flat and the main cylin-
der
– between the licker-in unit and the main cylin-
der
68 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Control settings

With this setting you determine the setting angle of
the blade on the first opening roll of the WEBFEED
licker-in unit. This setting option is only available
with the optional motorised adjustment. The
greater the angle the more waste is sorted out.

ming.
2. Select Lot data.
3. Scroll to Blade adjustment

PMS-M.
4. Select Blade adjustment
PMS and enter the setting
angle.
5. Accept.
Speed for WEBFEED Plus

You use this setting to determine the speed of both
the opener and the clearer roll on the WEBFEED
locker-in unit. The Webfeed Plus is optional.

ming.
2. Select Lot data.
3. Scroll to Webfeed Plus.
4. Select Webfeed Plus and

select the speed.
5. Accept.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 69

Control settings
Adjusting the PFS-M carding gap
Adjust carding gap PFS-M
Carding gap 6
The carding gap is pre-set by Trützschler after- The white item numbers on a blue background
sales service staff using six mechanical controlling (items 1 to 6) identify the positions of the mechani-
elements. You, as the operator, can alter the cal controlling elements. The values with a grey
carding gap in steps of one thousandth of an inch background show the possible adjustment range
(see section starting on page 101). Depending on for the carding gap, the values with a white back-
the card's equipment you can alter the carding gap ground show the current dimension at which the
using either the hand lever or the touch screen. carding gap has been set.
1. Select Settings / program- If you have altered the carding gap using Carding
ming. gap 6 button, two servo motors move the flexible
bend into the corresponding position. The gap
2. Select Lot data. measurements for the other items (1/1000" values
on a white background) are adjusted accordingly.
3. Scroll to Adjust carding gap For information read the section Activating the
PFS-M. revolving flat clothing starting on page 291.
4. Select Carding gap 6 and

enter the gap dimension.
5. Accept.
70 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Control settings
Setting limit values

Using both limiting values for the CV value and for T-CON monitoring
the maximum permitted number of thick spots and To safeguard the machine you must switch on the
the sliver count, you determine the parameters for automatic contact monitoring. However, for trouble
sliver monitoring (see section starting on page 90). shooting purposes or for test runs you can also
switch off contact monitoring in order to deactivate
CV value limit the automatic switch-off function.
With this setting you determine the maximum
CV value. The machine checks whether the limit Caution
value is being met at frequent intervals and of the Risk of serious damage to the machine!
limit value is exceeded, the machine is shut down If you switch off T-CON monitoring, the
and a fault message is issued. automatic switch-off function after a con-
tact has been made between the cylinder
1. Select Settings / program- and the carding elements is also dis-
ming. abled.
2. Select Limits. 1. Select Settings / program-
ming.
3. Select CV value limit and 2. Select Limits.
enter a percentage.
4. Accept. 3. Select T-CON monitoring.
4. Switch on T-CON monitoring.

Thick spot limit value
Enter here how many thick spots per kilometre Switch off T-CON monitoring.
should be permitted.

ming.
2. Select Limits.
3. Select Thick spot limit value

and enter the maximum value
per unit of length.
4. Accept.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 71

Control settings
TC-NCT limit values Communication

Using this menu item you select via which inter-
Notes
faces the machine can communicate with other
Further information can be found in
systems.
the operating instructions for the
NEPCONTROL TC-NCT nep sensor.
Activating communication interfaces
The nep sensor is not available for the
synthetic fibres card. The card has the following data interfaces:
If your card is equipped with an external video – The TST ("Trützschler Service Tool") gives
monitor for displaying camera pictures from the the Trützschler after sales service staff insight
TC-NCT nep sensor and you have activated it into all system areas and supports diagnostics
using the menu sequence Settings / program- and trouble-shooting.
ming > Communication > NCT monitoring, you – The individual machines of an installation
can enter the limit values for the TC-NCT at this are controlled via the TKN (Trützschler
point (see also page 73). Kommunikationsnetzwerk (Trützschler com-
munication network)) using a central com-
puter.
ming.
– The KIT ("Kardeninformationssystem
2. Select Limits.
Trützschler" (Trützschler card information
system)) provides card parameters as diag-
3. Scroll to Limit values NCT. nostics and maintenance data.

4. Select the desired limit value ming.
and enter value.
2. Select Communication.
5. Accept.
3. Activate TST; a green field
appears above.
On connection the globe at the
top right of the message line is
marked in colour.
Deactivate TST; the green
field is extinguished.
– Repeat the steps described above for the

TKN and the KIT depending on the given
system environment.
– Enter the appropriate network address for the
TKN and KIT networks respectively.
When the connection has been established, the
globe or the PC symbol at the top of the message
line is displayed in colour.
72 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Control settings
NCT monitoring NCT parameter set

You can select a suitable parameter set for the
Notes material to be processed.
the operating instructions for the 1. Select Settings / program-
NEPCONTROL TC-NCT nep sensor. ming.
The nep sensor is not available for the
synthetic fibres card.
Setting the margin 3. Scroll to NCT Parameter.

You use these menu items to set the left and right-
hand margins for NCT measurements.
4. Press NCT Parameter set
1. Select Settings / program- and select a suitable parame-
ming. ter set.
2. Select Communication. 5. Accept.
3. Scroll to NCT Parameter.

NCT internal fault
The number of internal nep sensor faults which
4. Press Left-hand margin or have occurred is shown here.

Right-hand margin and enter ming.
a value.
5. Accept.

Setting the threshold value
You use these menu items to set the threshold val- 4. NCT internal fault – Read
ues for thick spots and thin spots. number of internal faults.

ming.
4. Press Thick spot threshold

or
Press Thin spot threshold
and enter a value.
5. Accept.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 73

Control settings
Service functions
Unlike the "Service" mode which can only be called Suction pressure monitoring
up with the key-switch in the control cabinet, func- If the suction pressure exceeds a certain value, the
tions are included here which can be called up machine switches off. You can switch the monitor-
directly. ing function on or off. However, the system control-
ler switches the monitoring function back on after a
DFK active predetermined period.
If you want to remove material from the card – e. g.
for a material change – you can switch off the DFK
ming.
tuft feeder separately. In this way material is no lon-
ger fed to the card and all material which is inside 2. Select Service functions.
the card is ejected at the front.
1. Select Settings / program- 3. Select Suction pressure

ming. monitoring.
2. Select Service functions. 4. Switch on suction monitoring.
3. Select DFK active. Switch the suction monitoring

function off.
4. Switch on the DFK.

Metal detector
Switch off the DFK. If you have switched on the metal detector, the
machines switches off as soon as the feed roll
receives a metal particle. When reversing it is pos-
sible that there is temporarily no material available;
Funnel control at this stage it is possible that the metal detector
If you have switched on Funnel control, the will cut in and switch off the machine.
machine switches off as soon as the sliver count
You can switch the metal detector off when revers-
deviates considerably from the setpoint value.
ing. However, the system controller switches the
For this purpose the sliver count is measured in the
monitoring function back on after a predetermined
output measuring funnel.
period.
ming.
ming.
3. Select Funnel control.

3. Select Metal detector.
4. Switch on funnel control.

4. Switch the metal detector on.
Switch off funnel control.

Switch the metal detector off.
74 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Control settings
Test door locking Diagnostics / Statistic

You can use this function to check whether all elec-
trical door locking systems are working properly. Information
1. Select Settings / program- This screen gives information about the machine:
ming. Programme versions and their date are displayed
on the right below the machine designation. The
2. Select Service functions. serial number and the date of initial start-up follow.
The time and quantity produced in automatic mode
3. Select Test door locking. are shown after the operating hours counter (time
connected to the mains). The final thing you see is
the current temperature in the control cabinet.
4. Lock door.
The following page contains further functions for
the Trützschler after-sales service department.
Release door.
1. Select Diagnostics.
NCT monitor on 2. Select Information.

Inform the system whether or not an external video
monitor is connected to the card to show the cam-
era pictures from the TC-NCT NEPCONTROL nep 3. Scroll to the page Trützschler
sensor. Service.
Note This program area is for servicing work which is

This setting can only be made if the carried out by Trützschler after sales service staff.
NCT system has been activated. Make
sure that the NCT monitor is deactivated
if you have not connected an external
video monitor. Otherwise the nep sen-
sor's computing time will lengthen con-
siderably.

ming.
3. Select NCT monitor on.
4. Switch NCT monitor on.
Switch the NCT monitor off.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 75

Control settings
Log book
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Logbook 8
Machine operation is recorded in the log book. 1 Date

These are events which the machine reports and
2 Time
all operator interventions. Changes to settings are
also partly recorded in the log book. 3 Type of event
You can either list all events or fault messages only. 4 Description
The log book is not automatically updated whilst
5 Press button: Call up statistics
being displayed. Additionally, you can call up statis-
tics on machine statuses from the log book. 6 Press button: Update the log book
7 Press button: Switch between
– show fault messages only or
– show all events
8 Warning number, fault number, frequency of
event, setting
9 Scroll bar for navigating in the log book
76 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Control settings
Calling up the log book Speeds

Call up the log book as follows: With this button you can display the current speeds
of motors and rolls. The speeds of shafts which are
1. Select Diagnostics / driven by belts are calculated from the transmis-
Statistic. sion.
2. Select Logbook.
1. Select Diagnostics /
Statistic.
3. Show fault messages only.
2. Select Speeds.
4. Show all events.

Displaying current drafts
5. Select Statistic. If you scroll on from the Speeds window, in the
Drafts window you see an overview of Delivery
speed, Draft, Draft V4 and Card coiler tension.
6. Update the log book.
Statistic.
You can also select the log book from the basic 2. Select Speeds.
mask using the "Machine status 1" button.
The statistics show the status of the machine over 3. Scroll to the Drafts page.
the last 24 hours. Select a six hour period by typing.
The six hour period will then be displayed in a
larger scale below. Using your finger or the arrow
keys, place the cursor over any point in time to read
the machine status.
Calling up the PFS-M log book

If the carding gap has been re-calibrated as part of
servicing work using the mechanical setting ele-
ments, the new carding gap measurements appear
in this log book with the date of the alteration.
The PFS-M log book is only available if motorised
PFS flats adjustment is installed.
Statistic.
2. Select Logbook.
3. Scroll to the PFS-M Logbook

page.
Next to the column with the date you will find the
values for motor settings and for the six positions of
the mechanical controlling elements.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 77

Control settings
Sensors / measured values Maintenance

In this window the maintenance intervals are listed
Displaying current measured values which are monitored by the machine controller.
This is where you find an overview of all important Once the respective maintenance interval has
gap measurements and blade angle settings with elapsed, the message Maintenance interval
the sliver count currently being produced. exceeded appears and the "spanner" symbol is
shown in the top line of the touch screen.
Statistic. You may only reset the respective running time
counters if you have carried out the maintenance
2. Select Sensors / Measured work described in the chapter Maintenance.
values.
Statistic.
2. Select Maintenance.
3. Reset the desired counter.
4. Confirm the prompt Mainte-

nance accomplished?.
Changing maintenance intervals

You can adapt the permitted production quantities
to your production conditions.
Caution
Incorrect settings may cause damage to
the assembly groups of the machine.
These settings must only be made by
qualified persons with sufficient experi-
ence.
Statistic.
2. Select Maintenance.
3. Switch to the second page.
4. Select the desired production

quantity and enter the desired
value.
5. Accept.
78 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Control settings
Shift data
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Shift data
1 10
A shift is a defined period of production. A log is

kept of data from individual shifts. The ending of
one shift begins a new shift (shift change). The shift
change can be carried out manually or automati-
cally by a primary system (e. g. KIT).
1 Press button:
"Shift change when operator change"
on / off
2 Shift start
3 Shift duration
4 Production quantity
5 Efficiency
6 Number of machine stops and duration of
down times including faults (7)
7 Number and duration of faults
8 Number and duration of instances of the
"service mode" status
9 Next shift change
10 Press button: Perform shift change
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 79

Control settings
Displaying shift data

You can view the data from the current and past Printing shift data
shifts as follows: You can print the entire list as displayed on a printer
connected to the X1 serial port:
Statistic. 1. Print the list of shift data dis-
2. Select Shift data. played.
Shift change at midnight

The machine carries out a shift change at midnight
unless the shift change is triggered by a primary
system, an operator change or manually.
Manual shift change

If a primary/higher level system does not trigger a
shift change, you can trigger it manually as follows:
Statistic.
2. Select Shift data.
3. Perform a shift change.
Shift change with operator change

You can choose whether an operator change auto-
matically triggers a shift change. This option is not
available if a primary system controls shift manage-
ment.
Statistic.
2. Select Shift data.
3. Press button:
New shift with
operator change
No shift change
with operator change
80 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Control settings
Shift calendar
Shift calendar
3
2
4
1
6
In the shift calendar, you can file a weekly shift Changing the shift calendar
change plan. Up to 4 shift changes are possible per This is how you can change the shift calendar:
day.
The buttons in the Shift calendar window have the
Statistic.
following meanings:
1 Copy the shift times from one day to the next 2. Select Shift data.
2 Select calendar position and set or change

shift beginning 3. Scroll to Shift calendar.
3 Load shift data from CompactFlash card

4. Select calendar position.
4 Save shift data on CompactFlash card
5 Reset shift calendar to 24 hour shift, shift
5. Set or change the beginning
change 00:00 h
of the shift.
6 Accept changed shift calendar
Notes
You can use a CompactFlash card in the 6. Accept. Enter a further shift
ZPB4 central processor module to beginning as in 4.
exchange the data from the shift calendar 7. Accept the shift calendar.
with other machines with the same con-
troller.
The shift calendar is not available if shift
management is performed by a primary/
higher-level system.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 81

Control settings
Quality / statistics
Overview of lot data Quality diagrams

This is where you find the setpoints for the active lot In the diagrams which follow the following colours
as well as the set limiting values which have been are used:
defined for this lot. The individual pieces of lot data
Lines
are described from page 65.
red, horizontal: Limiting value
Listing lot data
yellow, horizontal: 1. Measured value
1. Select Quality / Statistic.
green, horizontal: 2. Measured value
green dotted, horizontal : Auxiliary line
2. Select Overview lot data.
green, vertical: Auxiliary line
white, vertical: Interruption, break in log, re-start of
Production and quality data log
Here, you find a summary of the current production Lower event bar
and quality data, such as production, draft, CV val- cyan / light blue, horizontal: Regulation OFF
ues and thick spots.
white, horizontal: Balancing in progress
red, horizontal: Draft deviation too large
2. Select Production and

quality data.
82 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Control settings
Draft deviation and CV values
Draft deviation and CV values

3
2
11.3 %
4
5
3.30 %
1.74 %
6
1
7
9 8
It is here where you find a summary of quality Call up the diagram as follows:
related card data. Current values, limiting values
and progress over time are shown. 1. Select Quality / Statistic.
If the machine stops for a long time, the log is inter-

rupted. This is shown in the diagram by a white, 2. Select Quality diagrams.
vertical line (9).
1 Progress of values, CV% and CVin 3. If desired, alter limiting value.
2 Progress of draft deviation, D%
3 Current draft deviation
4 Display: Draft deviation limit value
Press button: (no function stored)
5 Current CV% value at CCA funnel
6 Current CV-In value at card feed unit (ICFD)
7 Display: Limit CV% value at CCA funnel
Press button: Change CV% limit
8 Events bar:
white – regulation OFF
cyan / light blue – balancing in progress
red – draft deviation too large
9 Vertical, white line: Interruption, new log
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 83

Control settings
Spectrogram
Spectrogram
1 2
4
5
The spectrogram shows the extent of periodic Call up the diagram as follows:
sliver weight deviations in the form of a bar chart
above the wave length. 1. Select Quality / Statistic.
Clear deviations from the curve are referred to as

"chimneys" and imply a fault on one of the rotating 2. Select Quality diagrams.
parts within the machine.
1 Chimney 3. Scroll to page Spectrogram.
2 Sliver weight
3 Delivery speed
4 Navigation buttons, right-left
5 Currently selected wave length
(Press to call up the spectrogram analysis of
the wave length)
84 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Control settings
Spectrogram analysis
1 2
Spectrogram analysis
You can use the spectrogram analysis to establish You can also call up the diagram as follows:
the sources of faults which have brought about the
fluctuations in sliver weight. 1. Select Quality / Statistic.
1. Navigate to the chimney using the navigation

buttons (see previous page). To do so position 2. Select Quality diagrams.
the marker below the chimney.
2. Then press current measured value to call up 3. Scroll to page Spectrogram
the spectrogram analysis. analysis.
Values which are highlighted red (1) denote com-
ponents within the machine which may represent
the cause of the chimney (= the sliver weight devi-
ation).
3. Press the navigation button (2) to display the
upper half of the gearing layout.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 85

Control settings
Thick spots
2
3
Thick spots
1
This analysis points out the thick spots on the Call up the diagram as follows:
sliver.
1 Progress of measured values for the number
of thick spots per kilometre of sliver.
2. Select Quality diagrams.
2 Graphic display of the limit value
3 Current measured value of thick spots per
3. Scroll to page Thick spots.
kilometre
4 Limiting value for thick spots per kilometre
5 Reset measured values in column "T" on the
right-hand side of the table (6) to 0
6 Thick spot counters in blocks of 100 km and
three different size categories
The table columns are shifted left each time
100 km of sliver length is measured. T becomes
T-1, T-2 becomes T-3 etc. Column "T" on the right-
hand side shows the current count. The identified
thick spots are divided up into three categories
according to size and totalled up within the respec-
tive category. The 15% category contains the cate-
gories 20 % and 25 %. When the limiting value is
exceeded the display field is highlighted red.
86 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Control settings
NCT data Web statistics

If the TC-NCT is activated, the following data from The NCT web statistics diagram shows the thick-
NCT measurements is shown in this evaluation: ness and homogeneity of the material.
– Diagram for particle statistics Call up the diagram as follows:
– Measured values for particle statistics 1. Select Quality / Statistic.
– Diagram for web statistics
– Measured values for web statistics 2. Select Quality diagrams.
Note
3. Scroll to the NCT web statis-
tics page.
the operating instructions for the
NEPCONTROL TC-NCT nep sensor.
Exact values are shown on the NCT Data page.
Particle statistics
4. Select NCT Data.
The Nep particle statistics diagram shows the
quantity of neps, seed coats and trash in the mate-
rial.
Call up the diagram as follows:
2. Select Quality diagrams.
3. Scroll to the Nep particle

statistics page.
Exact values are shown on the NCT Data page.
4. Select NCT Data.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 87

Control settings
T-CON
Putting T-CON into operation
In order to put T-CON carding gap optimisation

into operation, you have to activate the T-CON
(see page 58) and switch on T-CON monitoring
(see page 71).
1. Allow the machine to cool to ambient temper-
ature. 1 2
2. Select Quality / Statistic -> T-CON and
scroll to the Adjusted minimal carding gap Machine ready
[1/1000''] window. Adjusted minimal carding gap [1/1000'']
0 Reference
Note
You cannot make any changes to the
carding gap until the machine is cold:
0 0
Cold machine: Arrow points to the blue
area on the left (1)
Warm machine: Arrow points to the red 0 0
area on the right (2) T-CON Gap advice
The Reference is only activated if the "Machine is

cold" temperature display is shown. This prevents
changes being made to the carding gap whilst the
machine is warm as they would be too low when
the machine is cold.
3. Insert T-CON plates and use a gauge to set
the carding gaps as per the setting recom-
mendations which start on page 116.
4. Press the Reference button.

Machine ready
Caution Adjusted minimal carding gap [1/1000'']
Risk of incorrect measured values! 9 9 Reference
Set the carding gaps immediately before
referencing. The carding gaps will other-
wise be calculated incorrectly. 16 16 12 12
Once referencing has been completed the fields for

the setting values are displayed with a yellow back- 10 10 10 10
ground and do not contain any values.
T-CON Gap advice
5. Press each of the five yellow buttons one by

one and enter the set carding gap for each
one.
88 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Control settings
Note
If the motorised PFS option is available,
the setting for the flats carding gap is
shown here with a grey background and
the value cannot be edited (see page 70).
6. Start production.
You will find more information on the T-CON start-
ing on page 43.
Can data
Listing can data

In this list you can see the average data from the
most recently produced cans by selected unit.
For each can, you will find a sequential number
(No.), the produced length (L[m]), the target sliver
weight (ktex), the quality of the incoming sliver
(CVin), the quality of the outgoing sliver (CV% and
CV1m), the number of thick spots (Thicks and the
average sliver deviation in the entire can (D%).
Note
If you have installed the optional TC-NCT
nep sensor, the respective measured val-
ues are displayed on the following page
of the touch screen display.
2. Select Can data.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 89

Control settings
Machine balancing
5 6 7 8
Machine balancing
9
4
a b c d
3
10
2
Calibrate DFK
1
Balance card Perform fine adjustment
11
1 Balance the card It is always necessary to balance the machine if

you change the material or if the environmental
2 Balance tuft feeder
conditions have changed.
3 Whilst balancing:
The card is equipped with three control circuits for
The number of passages and a seconds
ensuring the preset setpoint for the sliver count:
counter are displayed until the end of balanc-
ing. – on the DFK Tuft Feeder
If balancing is not being performed:
– on the ICFD (tray on material feed unit) and
The setpoint value for the feed motor is
displayed – on the CCD (sliver cutter).
4 a: Switch DFK regulation on and off The three control circuits interact so that any dis-
b: Switch ICFD regulation on and off ruptive influences in one balancing area which are
c: Switch CCD regulation on and off within the predefined limits can be compensated by
d: Switch metal detector on and off the others. The control range of the card (display
D%: re-adjustment of entire draft as a percentage)
5 DFK drive speed after balancing
lies within a range of ± 30 %. The card can keep the
(as a percentage of the maximum)
sliver count consistently within this range by adjust-
6 Web thickness after balancing (ICFD) ing the draft. If this range is exceeded the machine
switches off.
7 Sliver thickness after balancing (CCD)
8 Residual filling quantity of the can
9 Adjustment of draft as a percentage
10 Display Lot data menu to change the Sliver
count, the Delivery speed, the Total draft or
the DFK target pressure
11 Perform fine adjustment
90 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Control settings
Prerequisites for balancing

Before you can carry out machine balancing you Balancing the card
need to have already entered all essential lot data
1. If necessary, switch off the
such as the desired sliver count, the delivery
ICFD control circuit; the green
speed, the DFK target pressure, the total draft and
field above is extinguished.
other data.
The values with a white background are current Notes
actual values. The button Balance card is not activated
until the machine has run for a certain
Control circuits activated; the
amount of time.
green field appears
You can only balance the card if the con-
Control circuits deactivated; trol circuits are deactivated. If the control
the green field is extinguished circuits are not deactivated, a prompt will
appear accordingly.
Carrying out balancing 2. Check the sliver count.
1. Press the Machine balancing The value should be as near to the setpoint (10) for
button. sliver count as possible. Once the sliver meets with
your expectations you can balance the entire card.
The screen, as shown above, is displayed. The
button (10) shows the setpoints for sliver count, 3. Press button Balance card.
belt speed, total draft and DFK air pressure which
you have defined as the lot data.
The control circuits then make sure that the
Calibrating the DFK ICFD actual value is adjusted to the setpoint.
After the machine has run for a short time the but-
ton Balance DFK is activated. The current actual Carrying out fine adjustment
value for DFK air pressure is displayed below the Once you have balanced the card and produced
motor speed percentage (5). If the actual value around 200 m, check the sliver count once again.
matches the setpoint: Then enter the actual sliver count. The machine
then readjusts to achieve the predefined setpoint.
1. Press Calibrate DFK button.
1. Compare the sliver count with the predefined
setpoint.
The air pressure in the DFK's lower chute is then 2. If the actual value does not
measured in a series of four 20 second measure- match press the button Per-
ments and changed based on the measurements form fine adjustment and
recorded so that the setpoint for DFK pressure is enter the measured sliver
achieved. count (actual value).
3. Accept.
Then assess the sliver count again and repeat the

fine adjustment until the predefined sliver count
has been achieved.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 91

Control settings
Activating sliver monitoring

Sliver monitoring monitors the sliver to check for
compliance to limiting values for thick spots and the
CV value independently of the 3-way control
described above.
Short thick spots are detected as they pass through
the CCD funnel. If the set number of thick spots/km
is exceeded or if the set CV value is exceeded, a
fault message is shown and the material transport
stops.
To set the parameters for sliver monitoring see
Setting limit values on page 71.
4. Activate sliver monitoring (4d);

a green field appears above.
Deactivate sliver monitoring;
the green field is extinguished.
92 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Mechanical settings
Mechanical settings
This chapter contains recommended settings for Caution
the card which will enable you to set the card and Possible serious damage to the machine!
put it back into operation following a material Increasing the production and increasing
change. The specified values are designed to help the speed of the main cylinder generates
you to re-start the card after a material change more heat and thus causes the carding
without causing damage to the card. gaps to reduce.
Follow the settings specified in this chap-
However, you cannot achieve optimum quality until
ter to avoid causing damages.
you carefully adapt the settings to your material
and ambient conditions. The personnel carrying
Caution
out this setting work on the card must be appropri-
Possible serious damage to the machine!
ately qualified and have a wealth of experience.
After initial start-up of the card or after
replacing the flats clothing, the gap
between the flats and the main cylinder is
set larger to account for the opening up of
the flats clothing. This setting initially
causes the sliver quality to deteriorate.
Check the flats gap after a running-in
period and set it according to the values
which are entered in the Trützschler
setting log.
Caution
Damage to components and production
faults possible!
Incorrect settings can significantly disrupt
the production process and lead to exten-
sive repairs and adjustments.
Settings may only be changed by quali-
fied and authorised persons.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 93

Basic setting work Mechanical settings
Basic setting work

Setting the squeezing rolls
You can set the gap between the squeezing rolls 2
and the load of the squeezing rolls.
1
Note
Material-related setting dimensions for
the squeezing rolls can be found starting
on page 124.
Setting the gap between rolls (left)

1. Unscrew the lock nut (1).
2. Set the gap between rolls to the required
dimension using the adjusting screw (2).
3. Tighten the lock nut (1).
Setting the gap between rolls (right)

1. Loosen the locking screw (3) for the tension 5
roller to take the load off the toothed belt.
4
2. Loosen the lock nut (4) and set the gap
between the rolls using the adjusting
screw (5).
3. Tighten the lock nut (4) and check the gap
using a gauge.
4. Check the new gap at several positions
between the squeezing rolls using a feeler
gauge. 3
5. Tighten the locking screw (3) for the
tension roller and check the belt tension
(see page 217).
94 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Mechanical settings Basic setting work
Setting the loading of rolls

1. Loosen the lock nut (1) and the adjusting 2
nut (2). 1
2. Set the adjusting nut according to the follow-

3
ing table so that the pressure spring (3)
achieves the desired pretensioning.
3. Secure the adjusting nut with a lock nut.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 on the left-hand side of
the machine.
Setting the loading of squeezing rolls
Pretensioning of Length of spring L2

spring [N] [mm]
380 38
530 37
820 35
L2
1100 33
1400 31
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 95

Selecting delivery rolls

You use delivery rolls of different widths depending
on the material and required sliver weight. The 1
upper delivery roll (1) is marked with the roll width.
Refer to the following table for the roll width which
is suited to your requirements. m
11m
3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5
Sliver weight [ktex] to to to to to to to to to to
3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0
Width of the Cotton 9 9 9 11 11 11 13 13 13 15

delivery roll for:
[mm] Synthetic fibres 9 9 11 11 13 13 13 13 15 15
Blend 9 9 9 11 11 13 13 13 15 15
96 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Replacing the delivery rolls

1. Open the WEBSPEED and the measuring
funnel.
2. Relieve the belt tension.
3. Unscrew the lower screw (1) and remove the
lower delivery roll (2).
1
4. Unscrew the upper screw and remove the
upper delivery roll.
5. Push the upper delivery roll over the thrust

piece and the tensioning element onto the
shaft.
6. Push the lower delivery roll (3) over the thrust
piece (5) and the tensioning element (6) onto
the shaft.
7. Tighten the screws (4) for both delivery rolls
with 30 Nm torque.
Caution 3
Possible damage to card. The delivery
rolls must be clamped axially and it must
not be possible to turn them by hand.
4
Note
The settings on the delivery rolls are
described on the following pages. 5
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 97

Setting the delivery rolls

You can set the gap between the delivery rolls and
the load of the delivery rolls.
funnel.
Setting the position of the rolls

2. Loosen the locking screw (1) for the tension 2
roller (3) and the adjusting screw (2) to take
the load off the toothed belt.
1
3. Unscrew the screw (5) to release the front

delivery roll. 4 5
4. Set the front delivery roll to dimension (8) and

secure it using screw (5). 7
5. Unscrew the screw (4) to release the rear 0,1- 0,2
delivery roll.
6. Set the rear delivery roll to dimension (7) and
secure it using screw (4).
13 ± 0,10
98 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Setting the gap between rolls
The toothed belt is relieved of the load.

7. Loosen the lock nut (1) on the headless
1 2
screw (2).
8. Set the gap between rolls to the desired

dimension (3) using the headless screw (2). 3
0,1- 0,2
9. Tighten the lock nut and check the gap again.
10. Set the belt tension (see page 217) with the
adjusting screw and secure in place with the
locking screw.
4
11. Check the gap between delivery rolls using a
gauge.
34
Setting the loading of rolls
Note 5 6
Dimension (4) is set at the factory to
34 mm and thus corresponds to a loading
of 400 N.
12. Loosen the lock nut (6).
13. Set the adjusting nut (5) according to the fol-
lowing table so that the pressure spring (7)
achieves the desired pretensioning.
7
14. Secure the adjusting nut with a lock nut.
15. Check and adjust the belt tension as neces-
sary.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 99

Setting the loading of the delivery rolls
Pretensioning of Length of spring L1

spring [N] [mm] L1
0 38
200 36
400 34
600 32
800 30
100 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Setting the flexible bends
2 3
PFS-M flexible bend adjustment

Both flexible bends must be inspected every time
after flats have been activated and readjusted as
necessary so that the carding gap between the flats
clothing and the cylinder clothing is set to the cor-
rect dimension. The card's PFS-M flats adjusting
system is either fitted with a lever (3) for manual
adjustment or with a motor depending on the equip-
ment fitted. Using the manual or motorised actuat-
ing drive shift the V-ledge (2) on the wedge-shaped
flexible bend (1) so that the carding gap between
the flat and the cylinder is altered. You can read the
dimension of the carding gap from the dial (4).
For information refer also to the section Activating
the revolving flat clothing in chapter Maintenance, 5
which starts on page 291.
Setting the PFS-M reserve
For a new set of flats, set the distance to 6 on the
dial (=6/1000").
1. Unscrew and remove the locking screw on the
PFS-M flats adjusting system (5).
2. Shift the V-wedge so that the carding gap is
at 6 on the dial.
3. Screw in the locking screw on the PFS-M.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 101

Basic settings for the flexible bends
2 2
After a clothing change on the flat or on the cylin-

der, you must inspect and readjust the basic set-
tings of the flexible bends. The PFS-M system
allows an adjustment range of 8/1000" in individual
steps of 1/1000''. You can select from this range
which adjustment range is to be used for techno-
logical settings and which adjustment range is to be
used for grinding reserve.
The measuring points 2, 3, 4 and 5 which are
engraved on the side plate for measuring the card-
ing gap are situated in the extension of the adjust- 3
ing spindle (1).
Measuring points 1 and 6 are level with both
bores (2). To measure the carding gap at both
these measuring points you must position the flat
so that one of the flat's pins can just be seen in
position (3).
102 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

For manual PFS-M flat adjustment proceed as fol-

lows:
2
1. Remove every other flat from the upper flat
area (16 flats).
2. Then move the flats using the hand-held
remote control (2) so that the remaining flats 0
are in the carding area.
3. Loosen the fastening screws (1) on the flexi-
ble bends on both sides of the cylinder.
4. Measure the carding gap at measuring

points 1 to 6 one after the other using a gauge
and set to the required value using the spin-
dles.
3
Note
Press the flat lightly by hand at measur-
ing points 1 to 6 whilst setting in order to
prevent the flat from toppling.
4
5. Tighten the spindles with nuts (3) and (4) –
then check the carding gap once more and
readjust as necessary.
Caution
Card malfunction possible!
When refitting the flats make sure that the
direction of the clothing is correct.
6. Fit the flats.
Note
For information on motorised adjust-
ments of the carding gap, e. g. after flat
activation, refer to section on page 70.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 103

Tuft feeder feed roll
1/1000 inch
mm
= Setting point
= Inspection point
2,5 98
SENSOFEED integral tray (TC 07) EASYFEED feed tray (TC 06)
1,9 … 2,3 75 … 91 2,1 … 2,5 83 … 98

0,15 … 0,3 6 … 12 0,15 … 0,3 6 … 12
1,0 40 1,0 40
104 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Setting the PMS-M opening angle
min
0º max
15º
You can adjust angle Dusing the lever (2) in the

range of D = 0° ... 15°. In this way, you determine
the dimension of arc Â and thus the quantity of sep-
arated waste. For initial start-up, Trützschler rec-
ommends an opening angle D of between 5° and
10°. You can read angle Dfrom the dial (1).
In order to optimise the degree of cleaning, you
then carry out an analysis of the waste and adjust
opening angle D as necessary.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 105

Calibrating the feed table thick spots monitoring

SENSOFEED
The proximity switch (1) is positioned in the factory.
To do so, carry out the following working steps on
both sides of the machine.
1. Start material transport and let the web flow
into the feed table.
2. Undo the lock nut and screw in the cheese
head screw (2) so that the material transport 1
switches off.
The light emitting diode to the proximity switch
goes out.
3. Screw the cheese head screw out again to the
point at which the light emitting diode switches
back on.
2
4. Screw the cheese head screw out a further
1 mm and fix in place with the lock nut.
EASYFEED
To do so, carry out the following working steps on 3
1. Switch the card to service mode and scroll to
the Valve test page (see page 222).
2. Unfasten the headless screw (4) and shift the
plunger (3) so that the touch screen shows
"ICFD 0.5mm".
Caution
Risk of destroying the plungers.
Only tighten the headless screw lightly to
secure it in place. Excessive tightening
will cause the plunger to be crushed.
3. Tighten the headless screw (4) again.
4
106 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Setting the depth of penetration of the flat strips roll
– Turn the stop lever (2) clockwise in order to

separate the cleaning roll and the flats cloth-
ing (disengage); the stop bolt (1) locks this
position,
– pull the stop bolts and turn them anti-clock-
wise in order to lower the cleaning roll onto
the flats clothing.
The flats cleaning unit must be in the engaged posi-
tion for the following setting work.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 107

The penetration depth of the flat strips roll is set

according to the height of the flats clothing as fol- 1
lows:
1. Run the flats system using the hand-held
remote control (4) until both flat's guide pins
can be seen in the drilled holes (1).
2. Undo the lock nuts (2) on the setting dial on
2
3. Turn both setting dials (3) clockwise until the
strips roll no longer touches the flats clothing.
3
0
4. Remove the flats pin and measure height H of

the flats clothing (from the tip of the wire to the
H
clothing clip) using a calliper gauge.
5. Install the flats pin again.
6. Set the gap (5) between the strips roll and the
flats clothing to 7/1000" on both sides of the
5
machine using the gauge (6).
7. Turn the strips roll down with the aid of the
setting dials so that the wires of the roll
6
engage with the flats clothing.
Example:
measured height of flats clothing H 0 4 mm, turn
setting dials five whole revolutions anti-clockwise;
this is equivalent to 5 x 0.8 mm = 4 mm
8. Tighten the lock nuts on the setting dial on
108 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Gearing diagram for rolls and drives

1 DFK feed roll
1
2 DFK opening roll
2
3 Feed roll
3
4 Licker-in first opening roll
4
5 5 Second licker-in roll

6
6 Third licker-in roll
7
8 7 Cleaning roll for flat strips roll
8 Flat strips roll
9 Main cylinder
9
10 Doffer roll
11 Cleaning roll for stripping roll
12 Stripping roll
13 Pair of squeezing rolls

10
14 Pair of delivery rolls
11
12
Notes
Change wheels and motor pulleys with
13
the respective speeds are listed for spe-
cific materials in the following sections.
14
The diagram in the lower section shows
the doffer area of the card with just one
drive motor.
10
11
12
13
14
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 109

Changing draft V3 on the stripping roll
Doffer area with two motors
10
11
12
V3
13
14
Doffer area with one motor
10
11
12
V3
13
14
Change wheel Accessories and tools for the card

Stripping roll (ATB)
Number of teeth z 47 44
Draft V3 1.272 1.19
110 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Setting draft V4
– On machines with only one motor on the dof-
fer area you set draft V4 by changing the drive
wheel [MW].
– On machines with two motors on the doffer
area you set draft V4 on the operating unit.

funnel.
10. Loosen the locking screw (2) for the tension
roller to take the load off the toothed belt.
11. Undo the hexagon socket screw (1).
12. Remove the drive wheel [MW].
13. Fit the desired drive wheel.
14. Tension the toothed belt.
15. Close the WEBSPEED and the measuring
funnel.
1 MW 2
10
11
12
13
V4
MW
14
Drive wheel MW Accessories and tools for the card (ATB)
Number of teeth z 31 30 32 33 34 35
Draft V4 1.237 1.197 1.277 1.317 1.357 1.397
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 111

Setting the speed of the cleaning roll for the stripper roll
10
11
12
13
14
Motor Cleaning roll
Mains frequency Diameter Rotary speed

[Hz] [mm] [min1]
50 50 2313
60 45 2510
112 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Setting the braking unit

You must match the settings for the BRE 2 bring
unit to the speed of the cylinder. Check the coding
switch using the following table before starting up
the card.
Main cylin- Coding switch

der speed
S12/1 S12/2 S12/3 S12/4
up to
[rpm] (1) (2) (3) (4)
1
260 closed closed open open
2 5
360 open closed open open
460 closed open open open 3
560 open open open open
4
1. Switch the card off at the master switch and
secure it against being switched back on.
2. Set the coding switch as per the above table.
The following table lists the cylinder slow-down

times depending on mains voltage. The values may
vary depending on the belt tension or the operating
temperature of the motor.
Cylinder slow-down time [s]

Operating voltage at cylinder speed
Braking unit type
[V]
260 rpm 360 rpm 460 rpm 560 rpm
200 … 240 BRE 2 A 80 100 130 160
346 … 440 BRE 2 B 70 95 115 130
460 … 600 BRE 2 C 60 85 105 120
Note
Make sure that the drive belt on the cylin-
der do not slip during the braking proce-
dure.
3. If the drive belt slips, turn the
potentiometer (5) anti-clockwise to lengthen
the cylinder slow-down time.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 113

Setting the DFK outlet filter for transport air

At the top on the rear of the tuft feeder, you must set
the outlet filter for transport air so that the upper A
trunk has a constant filling level and the material in 1
it has an even density.
How the DFK outlet filter is equipped depends on 2
the number of machines in the installation (see fol-
lowing table). B
1 Air separator
2 Filter plate
3
3 Needle comb
Installation
Material and process
Individual machine 2 machines and up
Cotton
Ring-spun yarn combed or carded
B A
Cotton,
OE rotor-spun yarn
100 % synthetic fibres

PES / PAC B
Shiny viscose
Tuft blends of cotton and synthetic

fibres
B A
Cotton and synthetic fibres with flexibly
groupable cards (flex units)
Recycled and short fibres A
114 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

2
a
2 2
b
2 2
The schematic drawing shows examples of the set-

tings for the individual transport air outlet filters (2)
in an installation.
a = installation arranged in a line
b = installation arranged in a T-shape
Select the very small (5 ... 15 mm) openings (1) for
the slider to prevent web from building up on the
integrated air separator.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 115

Settings for 100 % cotton Mechanical settings
Settings for 100 % cotton

Settings dependent on production and speed
Adjust the production and main cylinder speed to Use the diagram and table in the following way:
each other so that their settings are within the tar-
1. Determine production.
get range shown inside the dotted line. Outside the
target range the sliver quality may drop and 2. Select the suitable speed.
machine damage may be caused.
3. Read distances.
Examples:
– Increase in production from 60 kg/h to 95 kg/h with a constant main cylinder speed of 500 rpm:
Flat position Twin top and Doffer Licker-in
blades, to to
1 2 3 4 5 6 doffer side cylinder cylinder
14 13 12 14 11
]
pm 13 12 11
d [r
14 11
e
r spe 13 12 11 14 10
nde ge
cyli an 12 11 10 13 10
M a in g et r
T ar
Distance [1/1000 inch]

12 11 10 13 10
11 10 9 13 9
550 11 10 9 12 9
11 10 9 12 8
500 10 9 8 12 8
10 9 8 12 8
10 9 8 11 8
450
400 10 9 8 11 7
20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Production [kg/h]
– Increase in the main cylinder speed from 450 rpm to 500 rpm with constant production:
blades, to to
14 13 12 14 11
]
pm 13 12 11 14 11
d [r
r spee 13 12 11 14 10
d e
y lin 12 11 10 13 10
in c
Ma 12 11 10 13 10
11 10 9 13 9
550 11 10 9 12 9
ge
ra n 11 10 9 12 8
get
500 T ar 10 9 8 12 8
10 9 8 12 8
10 9 8 11 8
450
400 10 9 8 11 7
20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Production [kg/h]
– Increase in main cylinder speed from 450 rpm to 500 rpm and increase in production from 80 kg/h to
100 kg/h:
blades, to to
14 13 12 14 11
]
pm 13 12 11 14 11
e d [r
r spe 13 12 11 14 10
nde
in cyli 12 11 10 13 10
Ma
12 11 10 13 10
11 10 9 13 9
550 11 10 9 12 9
ra nge 11 10 9 12 8
get
500 T ar 10 9 8 12 8
10 9 8 12 8
10 9 8 11 8
450
400 10 9 8 11 7
20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Production [kg/h]
116 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Mechanical settings Settings for 100 % cotton
Licker-in
Caution
Possible serious damage to the machine!
Increasing the production and increasing the
speed of the main cylinder generates more 1/1000 inch
heat and thus causes the carding gaps to mm
reduce.
= Setting point
Adhere to the distances specified in the fol-
lowing table to avoid causing damage. = Inspection point
0,55 22
II III
1,3 52 I
3,75 175
0,55 22
2,5 100
0,18 7 0,18 7
Gap from licker-in to

Licker-in speed Setting point 1 cylinder
1300
11
] 11
1200 [rp m
ed
First licker-in speed [rpm]
10
r sp e
nde
in c y li 10
1100 Ma 10
9
550 9
1000
ge 8
ran
get
500 T ar 8
900
8
400 450 500 550 600
8
Main cylinder speed [rpm] 450
400 7
20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Production [kg/h]
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 117

Basic setting for MTT extensions bends
1/1000 inch
mm
= Setting point
= Inspection point
0,7-1,25 28-50
C1 min. 1,0 min. 40 C2

8 1
0,56 22 1,0 40
7 2
6 3
5 0,89-1 35-40 0,89 35 4
4 5
3 6
2 7
1
1,0 40 0,56 22 8
A2
A1
1. Set cover sections A1.2 and C1.2.

2. Install and set cover sections 4 and 5.
3. After setting, remove cover sections 4 and 5
and fit the MTT version.
A cover section for the MTT version 2.3 can be
found in the accessories for the card.
118 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Revolving flat
Caution
reduce.
= Setting point
Adhere to the distances specified in the follow-
ing table to avoid causing damage. = Inspection point
3 4
2 5
1 6
The specified dimensions are the distances between the revolving flat clothing and the main cylinder
clothing.
Flat position
Setting points 1 … 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
14 13 12
] 13 12 11
[rpm
pe ed 13 12 11
nd er s 11 10
in c y li 12
Ma 12 11 10
11 10 9
550 11 10 9
ge
ra n 11 10 9
get
500 T ar 10 9 8
10 9 8
10 9 8
450
400 10 9 8
20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Production [kg/h]
Note
For a re-clothing, or for a first fitting,
select values which are around 4/1000’’
higher. Measure the distance 100 mm
away from the end of the flat pin.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 119

Revolving flats details
1/1000 inch
mm
= Setting point
= Inspection point
X Y
X Y
0,7-1,5 28-60
0,7-1,5 28-60
120 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Fixed flats in the pre-carding area

You can read the required distances for the types
of fitted Multi-Twin-Tops (MTT) directly from the fol-
lowing figures.
MTT 1.0 MTT 1.1, MTT 1.3

Cotton Cotton
B 2,03 80 B
2,03 80
8 8
0,41 16 0,41 16
7 7
0,56 22
6 0,56 22 6
5 1,27 50 5 1,27 50
4 4 0,46 18
0,41 16
3 3
0,56 22
2 2
0,46 18 1,27 50
1 1
0,48 19
MTT 1.2, MTT 1.4 MTT 1.5

Cotton with waste Bleached cotton
reduction
2,03 80 B
2,03 80 B
0,41 16 8
8
7
1,27 50 7
0,56 22
1,27 50 6
6
0,56 22
5 1,27 50
5
1,27 50
4
4 0,46 18
0,51 20
3
3 1,27 50
0,56 22
1,27 50 2
2
1,27 50
0,56 22 1
1
1,27 50 0,56 22
0,48 19
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 121

Fixed flats in the post-carding area

Replace the x values in the MTT diagrams with the Note
distances in the following table based on produc- Adjust the production and main cylinder
tion and speed. speed to each other so that their settings
are within the target range shown inside
the dotted line.
Outside the target range the sliver quality
X: Gap, Twin top
Setting points x and blade, may drop and machine damage may be
doffer side
caused.
14
]
rpm 14
e d[
s pe 14
er
cy lin d 13
in
Ma 13
13

550 12
e
ng 12
e t ra
500 T arg 12
12
11
450
400 11
20 40 60 80 100 120 140

Production [kg/h]
MTT 1.0 MTT 1.1 - 1.4

Cotton Cotton with waste
reduction
B x B x
x x
1
1
x
2
2
1,0 40 3
1,0 40 3
x 4 x
4
5 x
x 5
x
6
1,0 40 6
x 7 x
7
8 x
8
x
122 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

MTT 1.5
Bleached cotton
B 0,56 22
0,41 16
1
0,41 16
2
1,0 40 3
0,56 22
4
5
1,0 40
6
0,56 22
7
Symbol Fixed flat element
Cleaning element B
Cleaning element
Carding element
Cover section
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 123

Doffer section
1/1000 inch
mm
= Setting point
= Inspection point
0,5 20
1,5 60
2,5 100
0,5 20
0,2 8
2
0,18 7
Setting point 2
Material
mm 1/1000’’
Cotton 0.08 3
Cotton with honeydew 0.25 10
124 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Lower cover sections

Caution
reduce.
= Setting point
1,5 60
1,0 40 4,0 157
1,5 60
Note
Adjust the production and main Gap from doffer to
Setting point 3 cylinder
cylinder speed to each other so that
their settings are within the target 11
range shown inside the dotted line. ] 11
pm
Outside the target range the sliver e d [r
spe 10
n der
quality may drop and machine dam- c y li 10
M a in
age may be caused. 10
9
550 9
e
ang 8
g et r
500 T ar 8
8
8
450
400 7
20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Production [kg/h]
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 125

Change points, drive pulleys and rotational speeds

1 DFK feed roll
1
2 DFK opening roll
2
3 Feed roll
3
4

6
7
8 Flat strips roll
9 Main cylinder
9
10 Doffer roll
12 Stripping roll

10
11
12
Notes
13
the respective speeds are listed for spe-
cific materials in the following sections.
14
drive motor.
10
11
12
13
14
126 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

DFK opening roll change point
Notes
For cotton, you must set the speed of the
revolving flat to 180 mm/min on the touch
screen.
1 ø1
3 ø2
4
--- 50 Hz ---
DFK opening Accessories and tools for

Motor pulley
roll change wheel the card (ATB)
Ø1 Ø2 n Ø2 n
Material / process
[mm] [mm] [rpm] [mm] [rpm]
Cotton / ring-spun yarn

200 795 112 1420
combed or carded
112
Cotton /
112 1420 200 795
rotor-spun yarn
--- 60 Hz ---

Motor pulley
Ø1 Ø2 n Ø2 n
Material / process

200 791 112 1412
combed or carded
93
Cotton /
112 1412 200 791
rotor-spun yarn
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 127

Licker-in change point
7
8
Note
Select the values in square brackets [...]
for initial start-up or after re-clothing.
--- 50 Hz ---
Accessories and tools for

Licker-in motor pulley
the card (ATB)
Ø n4 n5 n6 Ø n6
Material / process
[mm] [rpm] [rpm] [rpm] [mm] [rpm]
Cotton / ring-spun yarn 120 994 1554 2047

135 2303
combed < 50 kg/h [112] [928] [1450] [1911]

combed > 50 kg/h 135 1119 1748 2303
120 2047
Cotton / [112] [928] [1450] [1911]
carded ring-spun yarn
Cotton / rotor-spun yarn 146 1210 1890 2491 135 2303
--- 60 Hz ---
Accessories and tools for

the card (ATB)
Ø n4 n5 n6 Ø n6
Material / process
Cotton / ring-spun yarn 108 1080 1688 2224

112 2306
combed < 50 kg/h [90] [900] [1406] [1853]

combed > 50 kg/h 112 1120 1750 2306
108 2224
Cotton / [90] [900] [1406] [1853]
carded ring-spun yarn
Cotton / rotor-spun yarn 120 1200 1875 2471 112 2306
128 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Main cylinder change point
Caution
Risk of serious damage to the
machine!
Increasing the production and increas-
ing the speed of the main cylinder gen-
erates more heat and thus causes the
carding gaps to reduce.
Follow the settings specified to avoid 9
causing damages.
10
--- 50 Hz ---
Accessories and
Main cylinder
tools for the card Flat speed
motor pulley
(ATB)
Ø n Ø n v
Material / process
[mm] [rpm] [mm] [rpm] [mm/min]
Cotton / ring-spun yarn 175 460

190 500 180
combed < 50 kg/h [155] [407]

combed > 50 kg/h 190 500
175 460 180
[155] [407]
Cotton / carded ring-spun yarn
Cotton / rotor-spun yarn 190 500 210 552 180
--- 60 Hz ---
Accessories and
Main cylinder
tools for the card Flat speed
motor pulley
(ATB)
Ø n Ø n v
Material / process
Cotton / ring-spun yarn 145 461

155 493 180
combed < 50 kg/h [125] [398]

combed > 50 kg/h 155 493
145 461 180
[125] [398]
Cotton / carded ring-spun yarn
Cotton / rotor-spun yarn 155 493 175 557 180
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 129

Settings for 100 % polyester Mechanical settings
Settings for 100 % polyester

3. Read distances.
Examples:
Flat position Twin top and Licker-in and

blades, doffer
0
0
0
0
40
50
35
45
1 2 3 x 6 doffer side to cylinder

18 17 16 17 14
18 17 16 17 14
17 16 15 17 14
17 16 15 17 14
]
m
17 16 15
[ rp
16 13
ed
17 16 15 16 13
e
16 15 14
sp
16 13
ge
er
16 15 14 15 13
n
nd
ra

16 15 14
li
15 12
et
cy
rg
15 14 13 14 12
ain
Ta
14 13
M
15 14 12
15 14 13 13 12
15 14 13 13 11
14 13 12 12 11
14 13 12 12 11
14 13 12 11 10
20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Production [kg/h]

blades, doffer
0
0
0
0
40
50
35
45

18 17 16 17 13
18 17 16 17 13
17 16 15 17 13
17 16 15 17 13
]
m
17 16 15 16 12
[rp
e
ng
12
d
17 16 15 16
ee
ra
16 15 14 16 12
sp
et
r
rg
16 15 14 15 12
de
Ta
lin
16 15 14 15 11
cy
15 14 13 14 11
ain
15 14 13
M
14 11
15 14 13 13 11
15 14 13 13 10
14 13 12 12 10
14 13 12 12 10
14 13 12 11 9
20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Production [kg/h]
130 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Mechanical settings Settings for 100 % polyester
95 kg/h:
blades, doffer
0
0
0
40
50
35
45
18 17 16 17 14
18 17 16 17 14
17 16 15 17 14
17 16 15 17 14
m]
17 16 15 16 13
[ rp
17 16 15 16 13
d
14
ee
16 15 16 13
ge
sp
16 15 14 15 13
an
er

16 14
nd
15
tr
15 12
e
li
14 13
rg
cy
15 14 12
Ta
ain
15 14 13 14 12
M
15 14 13 13 12
15 14 13 13 11
14 13 12 12 11
14 13 12 12 11
14 13 12 11 10
20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Production [kg/h]
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 131

Licker-in
Caution
reduce.
= Setting point
0,55 22
II III
1,3 52 I
3,75 175
0,55 22
2,5 100
0,18 7 0,18 7
Licker-in speed Setting point 1 Gap from licker-in to

cylinder
0
0
0
0
40
35
50
45
1300
14
14
1200 14
m]
14
[rp
13
1100
ed
13
e
sp
13
er
13
d
1000
ge
lin
12
ran
cy
in
12
et
Ma
rg
900 12
Ta
400 450 500 550 600 12

Main cylinder speed [rpm] 11
11
11
10
20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Production [kg/h]
132 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

1/1000 inch
mm
= Setting point
= Inspection point
0,7-1,25 28-50
C1 min. 0,64 min. 25 C2

8 1
0,64 25 0,64 25
7 2
6 3
5 0,89-1 35-40 0,89 35 4
4 5
3 6
2 7
1
1,0 40 0,55 22 8
A2
A1

914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 133

Revolving flat
Caution
reduce.
= Setting point
3 4
2 5
1 6
clothing.
Note
Setting points 1 … 6 For a re-clothing, or for a first fitting,
Flat position select values which are around
0
0
0
0
4/1000'' higher. Measure the dis-

40
35
50
45
1 2 3 4 5 6
18 17 16
18 17 16
tance 100 mm away from the end of
17 16 15 the flat pin.
17 16 15
m ]
[rp
17 16 15
ed
17 16 15
pe
16 15 14
rs
16 15 14
de
ge
lin
16 15 14
cy
ra n
15 14 13
in
t
Ma
rge
15 14 13
Ta
15 14 13
15 14 13
14 13 12
14 13 12
14 13 12
20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Production [kg/h]
134 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

1/1000 inch
mm
= Setting point
= Inspection point
X Y
X Y
0,7-1,5 28-60
0,7-1,5 28-60
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 135


The required distances between the main cylinder
MTT 2.5
clothing and the tip of the blade, holding down
100 % polyester
device or carding element for the types of multi twin
top (MTT) you have installed can be read directly
from the following diagrams. 0,64 25 B
8
Note 0,36 14
All values apply in conjunction with the
7
recommended speeds for the main cylin- 0,36 14
der on page 142.
6
0,38 15
5
0,38 15
4
0,41 16
3
0,41 16
2
0,48 18
1

Replace the X values in the MTT diagram with the
MTT 2.5
gaps in the following table, in line with the desired
100 % polyester
production.
Setting points x X: Gap, Twin top

doffer side
0
0
0
0
40
35
50
45
B 0,64 25
17
1
17
17
X
]
2
m
17
rp
16
d[
ee
16
sp
16 X 3
er
nd
15
ge
li
cy
15
an
4
in
14
tr
X
Ma
ge
14
r
Ta
13
13 5
12
12
11 6
20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Production [kg/h]
7
Note
8
Adjust the production and main cylinder
speed to each other so that their settings
the dotted line.
136 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Doffer section
1/1000 inch
mm
= Setting point
= Inspection point
0,5 20
1,5 60
2,5 100
0,5 20
0,2 8
0,25 10
0,18 7
Cleaning element B
Carding element
Cleaning element
Cover section
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 137


Caution
reduce.
= Setting point
1,5 60
1,0 40 2,5 100
1,5 60
Note
Adjust the production and main cylin- Setting point 2 Gap from doffer to
cylinder
0
0
0
0
der speed to each other so that their

40
35
50
45
settings are within the target range 14

14
shown inside the dotted line. 14
Outside the target range the sliver 14
m]
quality may drop and machine dam- 13

rp
d[
13
age may be caused.
ee
13
sp
13
er
e
d
ng
lin
12
t ra
cy
12
rge
in
Ma
12
Ta
12
11
11
11
10
20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Production [kg/h]
138 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008


1 DFK feed roll
1
2 DFK opening roll
2
3 Feed roll
3
4

6
7
8 Flat strips roll
9 Main cylinder
9
10 Doffer roll
12 Stripping roll

10
11
12
Notes
13
the respective speeds are listed in the fol-
lowing chapters according to material.
14
drive motor.
10
11
12
13
14
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 139

Notes
For polyester, you must set the speed of
the revolving flat to 100 mm/min on the
touch screen.
1 ø1
3 ø2
4
--- 50 Hz ---
DFK opening roll change Accessories and tools for

Motor pulley
wheel the card (ATB)
Ø1 Ø2 n Ø2 n
Material
100 % polyester 112 112 1420 200 795
--- 60 Hz ---
DFK opening roll change Accessories and tools for

Motor pulley
wheel the card (ATB)
Ø1 Ø2 n Ø2 n
Material
100 % polyester 93 112 1412 200 791
140 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

7
8
--- 50 Hz ---
Accessories
Licker-in motor pulley and tools for the card
(ATB)
Ø n4 n5 n6 Ø n6
Material
100 % polyester 112 928 1450 1911 102 1740
--- 60 Hz ---
Accessories
Licker-in motor pulley and tools for the card
(ATB)
Ø n4 n5 n6 Ø n6
Material
100 % polyester 90 900 1406 1853 75 1544
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 141

Caution
machine!
Follow the settings specified to avoid
causing damages. 9
10
--- 50 Hz ---
Main cylinder motor Accessories and tools for

Flat speed
pulley the card (ATB)
Ø n Ø n v
Material
100 % polyester 155 407 135 355 100
--- 60 Hz ---
Main cylinder motor Accessories and tools for

Flat speed
pulley the card (ATB)
Ø n Ø n v
Material
100 % polyester 125 398 110 350 100
142 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Mechanical settings Settings for 100 % viscose
Settings for 100 % viscose

3. Read distances.
Examples:
Flat position Doffer Licker-in
Twin top and to to
doffer side
1 2 3 4 5 6 cylinder cylinder

16 15 14 16 10
]
[r pm 15 14 13 15 10
ed
spe
der 15 14 13 15 9
y l in
500 in c 14 13 12 14 8
Ma ge
ran 14 13 12
get
14 8
450 Tar 13 12 11 13 7
13 12 11 13 7
400 12 11 10 12 7
350 40 60 80 100 120 140
Production [kg/h]
Flat position Doffer Licker-in
Twin top and to to
doffer side cylinder cylinder
1 2 3 4 5 6
16 15 14 16 10

]
[ rp m 15 14 13
eed 15 10
de r sp 15 14 13 15 9
y li n
in c 14 13 12 14 8
500 Ma ge
ran 14 13 12 14 8
get
450 Ta r 13 12 11 13 7
13 12 11 13 7
400 12 11 10 12 7
350 40 60 80 100 120 140
Production [kg/h]
95 kg/h:
doffer side to to
1 2 3 4 5 6 cylinder cylinder
16 15 14 16 10
]
[r p m
ed 15 14 13 15 10
spe
der 15 14 13 15 9
y l in
in c 14 13
500 Ma ge
12 14 8
ra n
get 14 13 12 14 8
T ar
450 13 12 11 13 7
13 12 11 13 7
400 12 11 10 12 7
350 40 60 80 100 120 140
Production [kg/h]
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 143

Settings for 100 % viscose Mechanical settings
Licker-in
Caution
reduce.
= Setting point
0,55 22
II III
1,3 52 I
3,75 175
0,55 22
2,5 100
0,18 7 0,18 7
Licker-in speed Setting point 1 Gap from licker-in to

cylinder
1300
] 10
[ rp m 10
pe ed
1200 d er s 9
y lin
in c 8
500 Ma ge
r an
g et 8
1100 450
T ar 7
7
400 7
1000
350 40 60 80 100 120 140
Production [kg/h]
900
400 450 500 550 600
Main cylinder speed [rpm]
144 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

1/1000 inch
mm
= Setting point
= Inspection point
0,7-1,25 28-50 C3
C1 min. 0,64 min. 25
C2
8 1
0,64 25 0,64 25
7 2
6 3
5 0,89-1 35-40 0,89 35 4
4 5
3 6
2 7
1
1,0 40 0,55 22 8
A2
A1

914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 145

Revolving flat
Caution
reduce.
= Setting point
3 4
2 5
1 6
clothing.
Note
Setting points 1 … 6 For a re-clothing, or for a first fitting,
Flat position select values which are around
1 2 3 4 5 6 4/1000'' higher. Measure the distance
16 15 14 100 mm away from the end of the flat
]
d [rp m 15 14 13
pee pin.
i n d er s 15 14 13
yl
500 in c ge 14 13 12
Ma ran
get 14 13 12
Tar
450 13 12 11
13 12 11
400 12 11 10
350 40 60 80 100 120 140
Production [kg/h]
146 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

1/1000 inch
mm
= Setting point
= Inspection point
X Y
X Y
0,7-1,5 28-60
0,7-1,5 28-60
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 147


The required distances between the main cylinder MTT 2.1 viscose
clothing and the tip of the blade, holding down
device or carding element for the types of multi twin
0,63 25 B
top (MTT) you have installed can be read directly
from the following diagrams. 0,36 14
8
Note
7
All values apply in conjunction with the 0,36 14
recommended speeds for the main cylin- 6
der on page 154.
5 0,38 15
4
Cleaning element B 0,38 15
3
Carding element
2 0,41 16
Cover section 1 0,48 18
Fixed flats in the post-carding area MTT 2.1 viscose

Replace the X values in the MTT diagram with the
gaps in the following table, in line with the desired
production.
B 0,64 25
Setting points x X: Gap, Twin top 1
doffer side
X
] 16 2
pm
d [r 15
pee
er s 14 X
y lind
in c 14 3
500 Ma ge
ran 14
a rget
450 T 13
13 4
400 12
X
350 40 60 80 100 120 140
Production [kg/h]
5
X
6
Note
Adjust the production and main cylinder
7
speed to each other so that their settings
the dotted line. 8
148 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Doffer section
1/1000 inch
mm
= Setting point
= Inspection point
0,5 20
1,5 60
2,5 100
0,5 20
0,2 8
0,2 8
0,18 7
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 149


Caution
reduce.
= Setting point
1,0 40 2
1,5 60 2,5 100
1,5 60
Note
Adjust the production and main cylin- Setting point 2 Gap from doffer to
cylinder
der speed to each other so that their
] 10

settings are within the target range [ rp m
pe ed 10
shown inside the dotted line. d er s 9
y lin
Outside the target range the sliver in c e
500 Ma ran
g 8
g et 8
quality may drop and machine dam- T ar
450 7
age may be caused. 7
400 7
350 40 60 80 100 120 140
Production [kg/h]
150 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008


1 DFK feed roll
1
2 DFK opening roll
2
3 Feed roll
3
4

6
7
8 Flat strips roll
9 Main cylinder
9
10 Doffer roll
12 Stripping roll

10
11
12
Notes
13
14
drive motor.
10
11
12
13
14
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 151

1 ø1
3 ø2
4
--- 50 Hz ---
Motor pul- DFK opening Accessories and tools for

ley roll change wheel the card (ATB)
Ø1 Ø2 n Ø2 n
Material
100 % viscose 112 112 1420 200 795
--- 60 Hz ---

Motor pulley
Ø1 Ø2 n Ø2 n
Material
100 % viscose 93 112 1412 200 791
152 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

7
8
--- 50 Hz ---
Accessories and
tools for the card
Ø n4 n5 n6 Ø n6
Material
100 % viscose 112 928 1450 1911 102 1740
--- 60 Hz ---
Accessories and
tools for the card
Ø n4 n5 n6 Ø n6
Material
100 % viscose 90 900 1406 1853 75 1544
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 153

Caution
machine!
causing damages.
10
--- 50 Hz ---
Main cylinder Accessories and tools Flat

motor pulley for the card (ATB) speed
Ø n Ø n v
Material
100 % viscose 155 407 135 355 100
--- 60 Hz ---

Ø n Ø n v
Material
100 % viscose 125 398 110 350 100
154 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Mechanical settings Settings for polyacrylic, blends and recycled material
Settings for polyacrylic, blends and recycled material

Licker-in
Caution
reduce.
= Setting point
0,55 22
II III
1,3 52 I
3,75 175
0,55 22
2,5 100
0,18 7 0,18 7
Licker-in speed
Carding Setting point 1
1300
production [kg/h]
mm 1/1000’’ 1200
< 90 0.175 7
1100
> 90 0.229 9
1000
> 130 0.279 11
900
400 450 500 550 600
Main cylinder speed [rpm]
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 155

Settings for polyacrylic, blends and recycled material Mechanical settings
1/1000 inch
mm
= Setting point
= Inspection point
0,7-1,25 28-50 C3
C1 C3
C2
8 1
C1 C2
7 2
6 3
5 0,89-1 35-40 0,89 35 4
4 5
3 6
2 7
1
1,0 40 0,55 22 8
A2
A1
Setting point C1 Setting point C2 Inspection point C3

Material
[mm] [1/1000’’] [mm] [1/1000’’] [mm] [1/1000’’]
Polyacrylic 0.64 25 0.64 25 min. 0.64 min. 25
Blends and
0.56 22 1.02 40 min. 1.02 min. 40
all other materials

156 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Revolving flat
Caution
reduce.
= Setting point
3 4
2 5
1 6
clothing.
Distances [1/1000"]
Carding production [kg/h]
1 2 3 4 5 6
< 50 14 13 12 12 12 12
< 100 14 13 12 12 12 12
Note
For a re-clothing, or for a first fitting,
select values which are around 4/1000''
higher. Measure the distance 100 mm
away from the end of the flat pin.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 157

1/1000 inch
mm
= Setting point
= Inspection point
X Y
X Y
0,7-1,5 28-60
0,7-1,5 28-60
158 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008


The required distances between the main cylinder Note
clothing and the tip of the blade, holding down All values apply in conjunction with the
device or carding element for the types of multi twin recommended speeds for the main cylin-
top (MTT) you have installed can be read directly der on page 167.
from the following diagrams.
MTT 2.3 MTT 2.4

100 % polyacrylic Blends of polyester and
recycled material
0,63 25 B 0,64 25 B
8 0,36 14 8 0,36 14
7 7 0,36 14
0,36 14
6 6 0,56 22
0,36 14
5 1,27 50
5
0,38 15
0,38 15
4 4
0,38 15 0,38 15
3 3
0,41 16
0,41 16
2 2
0,41 16
0,41 16
1 1
0,46 18 0,48 18
MTT 3.1 MTT 3.2

Blends of synthetic fibres Recycled material
and cotton fibres
2,03 80 B
2,03 80 B
8
0,36 14
8 0,36 14
7
0,36 14
7 0,36 14
6
6 0,56 22 0,56 22
5
1,27 50
5 1,27 50
4 0,38 15
0,38 15
4
3 0,41 16
0,38 15
3 0,46 18
0,41 16 2
2 0,56 22
0,41 16 1
1,27 50
1
0,46 18 0,48 19
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 159


Production-related settings
Replace the x values in the MTT diagrams with the
distances in the following table in line with the
desired production.
Material / process / Distances in the post-carding area [1/1000"]

production B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
MTT 2.4 Blends of polyester and

MTT 3.2 recycled material
< 90 kg/h 18 12 12 35/18 12 12 12 12
> 90 kg/h 20 14 14 45/20 14 14 14 14
MTT 3.1 Blends of synthetic fibres

and cotton, also on flex
units
< 90 kg/h 18 12 12 35/18 12 12 12 12
> 90 kg/h 20 14 14 45/20 14 14 14 14
MTT 2.3 MTT 2.4, MTT 3.2

100 % polyacrylic Blends of polyester and
recycled material
MTT 2.3 MTT 3.2
B 0,63 25 B X
1 X 1
0,30 12
2 2
X
0,30 12
3 3
X
0,30 12
4 4
X
0,30 12 5 5
X
0,30 12 6 6
X
0,30 12
7 7
X
0,30 12
8 8
X
0,30 12
160 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

MTT 3.1
Blends of synthetic fibres
and cotton fibres
B X
1
X
2
X
3
X
4
X
5
X
6
X
7
X
8
X
Note
All values apply in conjunction with the
recommended speeds for the main cylin-
der on page 167.
Cleaning element B
Cleaning element
Carding element
Cover section
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 161

Doffer section
1/1000 inch
mm
= Setting point
= Inspection point
0,5 20
1,5 60
2,5 100 0,5 20
0,2 8
0,25 10
0,18 7
162 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

1/1000 inch
mm
= Setting point
= Inspection point
1,5 60
1,0 40 0,20 8
1,5 60
Setting point 2
Material
[mm] [1/1000’’]
Polyacrylic 2.5 100
Blends of synthetic fibres and cotton,

3.5 138
recycled material
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 163


1 DFK feed roll
1
2 DFK opening roll
2
3 Feed roll
3
4

6
7
8 Flat strips roll
9 Main cylinder
9
10 Doffer roll
12 Stripping roll

10
11
12
Notes
13
14
the doffer area of a TC 03 with just one
drive motor.
10
11
12
13
14
164 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

1 ø1
3 ø2
4
--- 50 Hz ---
Motor pul- DFK opening Accessories and tools for

ley roll change wheel the card (ATB)
Ø1 Ø2 n Ø2 n
Material / process
100 % polyacrylic,
112 112 1420 200 795
and cotton,
flex units, recycled material
--- 60 Hz ---

Motor pulley
Ø1 Ø2 n Ø2 n
Material / process
100 % polyacrylic,
93 112 1412 200 791
and cotton,
flex units, recycled material
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 165

7
8
--- 50 Hz ---
Accessories and
tools for the card
Ø n4 n5 n6 Ø n6
Material / process
100 % polyacrylic 112 928 1450 1911 102 1740
Blends of synthetic and cotton

120 994 1554 2047 112 1911
fibres
Flex units with synthetic or cotton 112 928 1450 1911 102 1740
fibres 135 1119 1748 2303 120 2047
Recycled material 120 994 1554 2047 112 1911
--- 60 Hz ---
Accessories and
tools for the card
Ø n4 n5 n6 Ø n6
Material / process
100 % polyacrylic 90 900 1406 1853 75 1544
Blends of synthetic and cotton

108 1080 1688 2224 90 1853
fibres
Flex units with synthetic or cotton 90 900 1406 1853 75 1544

fibres 112 1120 1750 2306 108 2224
Recycled material 108 1080 1688 2224 90 1853
166 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Caution
machine!
causing damages.
10
--- 50 Hz ---

Ø n Ø n v
Material / process
100 % polyacrylic 155 407 135 355 100
Blends of synthetic and

175 460 155 407 150
cotton fibres
Flex units with synthetic or 155 407 100

175 460
cotton fibres 190 500 180
Recycled material 175 460 155 407 180
--- 60 Hz ---

Ø n Ø n v
Material / process
100 % polyacrylic 125 398 110 350 100
Blends of synthetic and

145 461 125 398 150
cotton fibres
Flex units with synthetic or 125 398 100

145 461
cotton fibres 155 493 180
Recycled material 145 461 125 398 180
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 167

Current settings on this machine Mechanical settings
Current settings on this machine

Enter the specific machine or production-related
information and settings for this machine in the fol-
lowing fields.
Customer:
Comm. No.:
Card No.:
Date:
Name:
Material:
Provenience:
Staple:
Micronaire:
Delivery speed: m/min
Sliver No.:
Production: kg/h
Air humidity: %
Temperature: °C
Uster CV: %
CV (card): %
Clothings
Feed roll
Licker-in
Main cylinder
Flat
Doffer
168 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Mechanical settings Current settings on this machine
DIRECTFEED tuft feeder
1/1000 inch
mm
= Setting point
= Inspection point
SENSOFEED integral tray (TC 07) EASYFEED feed tray (TC 06)
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 169

Licker-in
1/1000 inch
mm
= Setting point
= Inspection point
II III
170 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

1/1000 inch
mm
= Setting point
= Inspection point
C3
C1 C2
8 1
7 2
6 3
5 4
4 5
3 6
2 7
1 8
A1
A2
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 171

Revolving flat
1/1000 inch
mm
= Setting point
= Inspection point
3 4
2 5
1 6
PFS
172 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

1/1000 inch
mm
= Setting point
= Inspection point
X Y
X Y
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 173


Enter the set distances for the types of multi twin
top (MTT) you have installed in the empty fields.
MTT 1.0 MTT 1.1, MTT 1.3
B B
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
MTT 1.2, MTT 1.4 MTT 1.5
B
B
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
174 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

MTT 2.1 MTT 2.3
B B
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
MTT 2.4 MTT 2.5
B B
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 175

MTT 3.1 MTT 3.2
B B
8
8
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
176 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

MTT 1.0 MTT 1.1 - 1.4
B B
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
MTT 1.5 MTT 2.1
B
B
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 177

MTT 2.3 MTT 2.4
B
B
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
MTT 2.5 MTT 3.1
B
B
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
178 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

MTT 3.2
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 179

Doffer section
1/1000 inch
mm
= Setting point
= Inspection point
Load:
N
180 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

1/1000 inch
mm
= Setting point
= Inspection point
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 181

182 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Faults
Faults
Fault messages
If a fault occurs, the red "Fault" symbol appears in
the top row of buttons, a fault message window is
displayed and the material transport system is
stopped. All faults are recorded in the log book.
Faults take priority over warnings.
Structure of a fault message
4
E0336 Squeezing rolls left
3 5
8 7 6
1 Location designation, electrical equipment Note

(for Trützschler after-sales service staff only) If the fault has not yet been remedied, the
button (6) appears in grey and you can-
2 Machine overview
not acknowledge the fault. When the fault
3 Fault location in the overview has been remedied, the symbol changes
to red and the fault can then be acknowl-
4 Fault number and fault message
edged.
5 Detailed picture of fault or display of a fault
group: Electrics, CAN, pneumatics, servo
drives, speed / rotational speed, time monitor-
ing, general, system (software)
6 Press button: Acknowledge fault
7 Press button: Next fault
8 Press button: Additional information for
Trützschler after-sales service department
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 183

Faults
In the event of a fault, proceed as follows: The following table is arranged in ascending order
of fault message numbers.
1. With the help of the fault message, localise
and remedy the fault.
Note
2. Acknowledge the fault by If a fault message is displayed and a but-
pressing the button (red). ton outside the fault message window is
pressed, the fault message will disap-
3. Start the card again. pear. However, the fault has not yet been
acknowledged.
In this case, press the button "Call up
Fault table fault message" in the top row of buttons
If a fault occurs during machine operation that you again to display the fault message again.
cannot remedy using the fault table below, please The fault can then be remedied and
contact the Trützschler after-sales service depart- acknowledged in the fault message win-
ment. dow with button (6).
No. Fault message Cause or significance Remedy
124 Plant not ready for operation Feeder installation is not ready Remedy fault in the feeder
for operation. installation,
start feeder installation again,
wait until feeding pressure is
reached.
141 Sliver break The carded sliver has broken. Check the carded sliver.
Thread the carded sliver into
the coiler cover.
142 Sliver cutter The sliver cutter on the coiler is Check the sliver cutter's pneu-
not moving. matic drive and the mechanical
setting.
150 CAN communication bus doffer A CAN communication fault Check the cable connections of
drive has occurred in the area of the the bus system.
doffer drive.
The fault message cannot be
acknowledged. Carry out a
system reset with the master
switch.
184 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Faults
155 CAN communication feeder A CAN communication fault Check the cable connections of
drive has occurred in the area of the the bus system.
feed mechanism drive.
switch.
156 CAN bus malfunction A fault has occurred in the Check the cable connections of
CAN bus system. No reaction the bus system.
from several or all the bus sub-
scribers.
switch.
157 CAN communication delivery A fault has occurred in the Check the cable connections of
unit drive CAN bus system in the area of the bus system.
the delivery drive.
switch.
167 Flats drive The rotational speed of the Check the flats drive.
card flats is too low.
179 DFK opening roll not started The opening roll has not Check motor, sensors, belts
started. and belt tension.
180 DFK opening roll speed not The specified opening roll Check motor, sensors, belts
reached speed is not reached. and belt tension.
181 DFK opening roll speed too low The specified opening roll Check motor, sensors, belts
speed was reached – but then and belt tension.
dropped again.
183 Turnstile drive not started The turnstile has not moved at Check the corresponding sen-
the can change. sor and the turnstile drive.
195 Feed monitoring The inlet monitor has tripped Reverse the machine
due to the feed of excessively (see page 212).
thick material.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 185

Faults

201 External quality stop The card information system Determine the cause of the
(KIT) has switched off the card. shutdown from the KIT mes-
sage.
207 Enable servo card deposit The limit switches connected to Check the limit switches
the enable input of the servo against the electrical circuit
modules are not the same as diagram.
the corresponding limit switch
terminal on the controller.
208 Enable servo card delivery The limit switches connected to Check the limit switches
209 Enable servo card doffer The limit switches connected to Check the limit switches
210 Enable servo card feeder The limit switches connected to Check the limit switches
211 Frequency converter flats drive The frequency converter of the Check the corresponding fre-
flats drive is not ready for oper- quency converter.
ation.
212 Frequency converter DFK The frequency converter of the Check the corresponding fre-
feeder DFK feeder drive is not ready quency converter.
for operation.
215 Frequency converter rotary The frequency converter of the Check the corresponding fre-
can plate rotary can plate drive is not quency converter.
ready for operation.
186 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Faults
236 ICFD maximum value The difference between the Check the entered tolerance
exceeded web feed at the ICFD and the limit.
calibration value is larger than
Reduce the trunk opening to
that set in Web thickness tol-
reduce the density of the web.
erance (Settings / program-
ming > Machine settings).
240 DFK pulse from RIK not active The RIK board receives no Check the corresponding sen-
pulses from the safety monitor- sors.
ing system of the DFK.
241 Pulse deposit drive The ADB3 board has regis- Check cable connections,
tered no pulses from the check the ADB3 board, check
deposit servo module. the servo module.
242 Pulse feeder drive The ADB3 board has regis- Check cable connections,
tered no pulses from the feeder check the ADB3 board, check
servo module. the servo module.
243 Pulse main cylinder from RIK The RIK board receives no Check the corresponding sen-
not active pulses from the safety monitor- sors.
ing system of the main cylinder.
244 Pulse licker-in from RIK not The RIK board receives no Check the corresponding sen-
active pulses from the safety monitor- sors.
ing system on the licker-in.
246 WEBSPEED monitoring The Webspeed is open. Close the Webspeed.

Check the limit switches.
248 Comb box Locking arm on comb box is Lock the comb box correctly
not closed. with the locking arm. Check the
limit switches.
258 Can magazine is empty No empty can is available in Place an empty can into the
the can changer. can changer. Check the limit
switches.
259 Can magazine is full There is still a full can in the Transport the full can out of the
can changer. can changer. If necessary,
check the corresponding limit
switch.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 187

Faults
263 Can change A fault has occurred during the Perform a manual can change.
can change.
302 Metal detector Metal particles detected in the Reverse the machine (see
web. page 212) and remove the
metal particles.
311 Motor protection switch has A motor protection switch has Check the settings on the
tripped tripped due to an overload. motor protection switch. Check
the drive concerned, turn on
the motor protection switch
again.
312 Motor thermistor has tripped The drive motor for the cylin- Check the affected drive and
der, licker-in or optional filter eliminate the cause of over-
box has become too hot (only heating.
applies to fixed frequency
motors).
320 EMERGENCY STOP An emergency stop button has Establish the reason for the
been pressed. emergency stop, remedy the
cause and release the emer-
gency stop button again.
325 PFS-M left The motorised flats adjustment Check the mechanical equip-
system left has not reached the ment of the left-hand flats
desired position. adjustment system and the
corresponding drive.
326 PFS-M right The motorised flats adjustment Check the mechanical equip-
system right has not reached ment of the right-hand flats
the desired position. adjustment system and corre-
sponding drive.
330 PMS-M The motorised blade adjust- Check the mechanical equip-
ment system has not reached ment of the blade adjustment
the desired position. system and corresponding
drive.
336 Squeezing rolls left A thick spot has entered the Remove thick spots, re-start
card between the squeezing the card and check the respec-
rolls on the left-hand side. tive sensor as necessary.
188 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Faults
337 Squeezing rolls right A thick spot has entered the Remove thick spots, re-start
card between the squeezing the card and check the respec-
rolls on the right-hand side. tive sensor as necessary.
363 Coil deposit plate sensor No signal from the sensor at Check the corresponding sen-
sliver coil plate. sor.
368 Doffer servo drive A fault has occurred on the Press the (i) button and pro-
deposit servo drive. ceed according to the detailed
information.
369 Delivery unit servo drive A fault has occurred on the Press the (i) button and pro-
servo drive of the delivery unit. ceed according to the detailed
information.
377 Feeder servo drive A fault has occurred on the Press the (i) button and pro-
feeder servo drive. ceed according to the detailed
information.
380 Safety circuit is interrupted The safety circuit is interrupted Check the limit switches.
and no feedback was detected
Check the plug connectors or
from the limit switch terminals.
clamp terminals.
382 Fuse monitoring The fuse has tripped. Reset the fuse. If necessary,
check whether a short circuit or
overload has occurred.
385 Memory error Changes have been made on If the error occurs again after
the machine. The control pro- switching on, check the bat-
gram has been changed or a tery, check the dip switches for
genuine memory error has the battery and acknowledge
occurred. the fault. If the error endures,
inform the Trützschler after-
sales service department.
386 EEprom memory error The EEPROM is defective or Acknowledge the fault. If the
the control program has been error endures, inform the
replaced. Trützschler after-sales service
department.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 189

Faults
391 Blockage on sliver coil plate The sliver material is piling up Eliminate the sliver material
on the sliver coiling plate. blockage and thread in the
sliver again. If necessary,
check the corresponding sen-
sor.
404 Machine controller The temperature in the Switch off the machine and
temperature machine controller is too high. allow it to cool.
Check the control cabinet fan.
413 Main cylinder not started The main cylinder has not Check motor, sensors, belts
started. and belt tension.
416 Main cylinder speed not The specified main cylinder Check motor pulley.
reached speed is not reached.
417 Main cylinder speed exceeded The specified main cylinder Check motor, sensors, belts
speed was reached - and con- and belt tension.
tinued to rise.
419 Doors DFK The doors on the DFK could Check the respective safety
not be locked. locking device.
420 Doors left The doors on the left-hand side Check the respective safety
could not be locked. locking systems.
421 Doors right The doors on the right-hand Check the respective safety
side could not be locked. locking device.
426 Suction pressure monitoring The measured suction pres- Check the system filter. If nec-
sure is below the set pressure. essary, check the correspond-
ing pressure switch.
430 CV value monitoring The CV value is higher than the Check the settings in CV value
value set under CV value limit limit (Settings / program-
(Settings / programming > ming > Limits).
Limits).
Remove fibre build-up from the
web doffing area.
190 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Faults
431 Thick spots monitoring The number of thick spots is Check the information in Thick
higher than the value set under spot limit value (Settings /
Thick spot limit value programming > Limits).
(Settings / programming >
Remove fibre build-up from the
Limits)
web doffing area.
433 Spectrogram monitoring The quality fluctuations in the Using the spectrogram analy-
sliver are too high. sis (see page 85), look for red
roll symbols and check the
respective rolls for damage.
451 Draft deviation The current draft deviates from Start the machine again, check
the set draft (Settings / pro- the sliver count, balance the
gramming > Lot data > Mini- card again.
mum draft or Maximum draft)
by more than ± 30 %.
455 Licker-in not started The licker-in has not started. Check motor, sensors, belts
and belt tension.
456 Licker-in speed not reached The specified licker-in speed is Check motor, sensors, belts
not reached. and belt tension.
457 Licker-in speed too low The specified licker-in roll Check motor, sensors, belts
speed has been achieved - but and belt tension.
then dropped again.
465 DFK maintenance flap The maintenance flap on the Close the maintenance flap.
DFK is open. If necessary, check the corre-
sponding limit switch.
470 Lap monitoring on delivery roll There is a thick spot between Remove the thick spot from the
the CCA delivery rolls. CCA delivery rolls. If neces-
sary, check the corresponding
sensor.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 191

Faults
475 Deposit servo drive A fault has occurred on the Press the (i) button and pro-
deposit servo drive. ceed according to the detailed
information.
479 CAN communication deposit A fault has occurred in the CAN Check the cable connections of
drive bus system in the area of the the bus system.
deposit drive.
switch.
481 Main cylinder speed too low The specified main cylinder Check motor, sensors, belts
speed was reached - and is and belt tension.
dropping again.
506 Cover safety mechanism The protective hood on the Close the protective hood on
coiler is not closed properly. the coiler.
516 Lap monitoring calender left The calender roll has a lap. Remove the lap.
517 Lap monitoring roll 1 left Roll 1 has a lap. Remove the lap.
520 Lap monitoring calender right The calender roll has a lap. Remove the lap.
521 Lap monitoring roll 1 right Roll 1 has a lap. Remove the lap.
192 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Faults
526 Sliver breakage limit switch Material jam in the coiler's Clear the material jam.
sliver coiling tube.
527 External EMERGENCY STOP The emergency stop button on After eliminating the cause,
the primary/higher level instal- release the emergency stop
lation controller has been acti- button on the primary/higher
vated. level installation controller and
check the indicated terminals.
593 CAN communication main A fault has occurred in the CAN Check the cable connections of
cylinder drive bus system in the area of the the bus system.
main cylinder drive.
acknowledged.
Carry out a system reset with
the master switch.
594 CAN communication licker-in A fault has occurred in the CAN Check the cable connections of
drive bus system in the area of the the bus system.
licker-in drive.
acknowledged.
Carry out a system reset with
the master switch.
705 Funnel control (+) The value for the sliver count Look for and clear the cause for
has suddenly been exceeded. the thick spot.
711 Funnel control (-) The sliver count has suddenly Look for and clear the cause for
dropped below the set value. the thin spot.
721 Material suction monitoring The measured suction pres- Check the system filter. If nec-
727 Flat strips suction monitoring The measured suction pres- Check the system filter. If nec-
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 193

Faults
985 TMB1 defect Fault on the T-CON TMB1 Check and replace the TMB1
module. module as necessary.
1086 T-CON – contact with cylinder The T-CON has detected a Locate the contact point
wire contact between the cylinder according to the location indi-
and licker-in, flats pins, doffer cated on the title line of the
or a twin top cassette (too touch screen. Remove the
many pulses per unit of time). respective components and
eliminate the cause of the con-
tact. Set all elements according
to the setting plan.
1087 T-CON – continuous contact The T-CON has detected a Remove the respective compo-
continuous contact (> 60 s) nents and eliminate the cause
between the cylinder and of the contact. Set all elements
licker-in, doffer or a twin top according to the setting plan.
cassette.
1088 T-CON – aborted self-test A fault has occurred on the Check the T-CON modules
T-CON system. (see information starting on
page 223).
1229 T-CON – Temperature sensor One of the T-CON system's Check all the T-CON tempera-
defective temperature sensors is faulty. ture sensors the replace faulty
sensor.
1263 Webfeed Plus speed exceeded The drive belt has slipped or is Check the belt tension (see
too loose. page 261) and if necessary,
replace the drive belt.
The pressure control switch is Replace the drive motor.
defective.
The rolls become blocked if Reduce the material feed rate.
there is too much material.
1264 Webfeed Plus drive The frequency converter for Check the respective fre-
the stepping motor is not ready quency converter.
for operation.
1386 DFK slide valve The slide valve has not opened Check the mechanics, the
properly. compressed air supply and the
mechanical settings.
194 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Faults
Warnings
Warnings indicate events on the machine that
should be noted by the operator. In the event of a 1. Display: Warning
warning, the signal lamp lights up in yellow and the Press key: Display the current
machine continues to run. A warning remains in warning.
place until the limiting value which has been
exceeded, for instance, is undershot again. Warn- 2. On the basis of the warning, determine the
ings are not constantly shown on the touch screen location of the problem and remedy the
if in addition faults have occurred. Only when all the cause.
faults have been acknowledged does the corre-
Warnings are recorded in the logbook.
sponding symbol for the warning appear in the top
line of the basic mask again. The following table is arranged in ascending order
of warning message numbers.
No. Warning Cause or significance Action
62 Thick spots Thick spots identified in the Check and clean the transfer
sliver. areas from the cylinder doffer
to the CCD funnel.
144 Sliver monitoring deactivated The sliver monitoring has been Select dialogue window
switched off via the Machine Machine balancing and acti-
balancing dialogue box. vate sliver monitoring again.
162 CCD regulation deactivated CCD regulation has been Select the dialogue window
deactivated in the dialogue Machine balancing and acti-
window Machine balancing. vate CCD regulation again.
173 DFK regulation deactivated DFK regulation has been deac- Select the dialogue window
tivated in the dialogue window Machine balancing and acti-
Machine balancing. vate DFK regulation again.
175 DFK deactivated The tuft feeder has been Select the Settings / program-
switched off. ming > Service functions
menu. Press button DFK
active to switch on the DFK.
235 ICFD regulation deactivated Regulation has been switched none

off manually.
258 Can magazine is empty No empty can is available in Place an empty can into the
the can changer. can changer.
Check the limit switches.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 195

Faults
259 Can magazine is full There is still a full can in the Transport the full can out of the
can changer. can changer.
If necessary, check the corre-
sponding limit switch.
Note
The point at which this warning appears depends on the can
monitoring setting in the menu Settings / programming >
Machine settings.
303 Metal detector deactivated The metal detector has been Select the Settings / program-
switched off. ming > Service functions
menu. Press the Metal detec-
The system controller switches
tor button to switch on the
the metal detector on again
metal detector.
automatically after a set period
of time.
404 Machine controller The temperature in the Switch off the machine and
temperature machine controller is too high. allow it to cool.
Check the control cabinet fan.
406 TKN network fault A fault has occurred in the TKN Switch on the plant control.
network.
Check the TKN connection.
407 TKN network not active Machine starts, but has not yet Switch on the plant control.
received data in the plant con-
Check the TKN connection.
trol unit.
426 Suction pressure monitoring The measured suction pres- Check the system filter. If nec-
427 Suction pressure monitoring The suction pressure monitor- Select the Settings / program-
deactivated ing has been switched off. ming > Service functions
menu. Press the Suction
pressure monitoring button
the monitoring on again auto-
to switch the function on.
matically after a set period of
time.
486 Webspeed key activated The Webspeed key has been Press the Webspeed key to
pressed and the Webspeed is close the Webspeed.
open.
196 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Faults
542 Twin-Tops (Licker-in) The maintenance interval has Carry out and acknowledge/
elapsed. cancel maintenance work.
543 Flats The maintenance interval has Carry out and acknowledge/
544 Cylinder The maintenance interval has Carry out and acknowledge/
545 Twin-Tops (doffer) The maintenance interval has Carry out and acknowledge/
546 Doffer The maintenance interval has Carry out and acknowledge/
597 Check diameter of pulleys The speed on one or more belt Check the diameter of the belt
pulleys is too high because a pulleys. Fit belt pulleys with the
belt pulley with the wrong diam- correct diameter.
eter has been fitted.
635 External quality warning The KIT card information sys- Check feeding and web doff-
tem has issued a quality warning; check regulating parame-
ing. ters and change as necessary.
727 Flat strips suction monitoring The measured suction pres- Check the system filter. If nec-
739 Funnel monitoring switched off The funnel monitoring has Select the Settings / program-
been switched off. ming > Service functions
menu. Press the Funnel con-
trol button to switch the func-
the monitoring on again auto-
tion on.
matically after a set period of
time.
1092 EASYFEED left, The feed lattice is not moving Check the feed lattice and
no movement or is stuck. free it.
1093 EASYFEED right, The feed lattice is not moving Check the feed lattice and
no movement or is stuck. free it.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 197

Faults
1094 EASYFEED too uneven The compacted web is distrib- Check the tuft feeder.
uted too unevenly over the feed
Check the feed lattice and free
lattice.
it up as necessary.
1103 T-CON – monitoring T-CON monitoring has been Switch T-CON monitoring on.
deactivated switched off.
1216 Carding gap too small – The carding gap between the Stop the card and set the card-
licker-in licker-in and the cylinder has ing gap according to the setting
dropped below the permitted plan (see information starting
dimension. on page 116).
MTT licker-in side twin top cassettes and the cyl- ing gap according to the setting
inder on the licker-in side has plan (see information starting
dropped below the permitted on page 116).
dimension.
1230 Carding gap too small – flats The carding gap between the Stop the card and set the card-
flats pins and the cylinder has ing gap according to the setting
MTT doffer side twin top cassettes and the cyl- ing gap according to the setting
inder on the doffer side has plan (see information starting
dropped below the permitted on page 116).
dimension.
1244 ICFD to be checked The feed lattice is not moving Check the feed lattice and
or is stuck. free it.
1262 Carding gap too small – doffer The carding gap between the Stop the card and set the card-
doffer and the cylinder has ing gap according to the setting
198 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Faults
LED displays in the control cabinet
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
The diagram shows the components of the control Servo modules

cabinet for the a card with the maximum equip- The servo modules control the servo drives. There
ment. The components may differ depending on are three different types of servo module:
the card's particular equipment.
– SE power supply servo module
During troubleshooting, the LEDs of the electronic
modules in the control cabinet can give additional – Servo module SM10
information. For this reason, the group of the fre-
– SM20 / SM30 / SM 40 servo module
quency converters (1 and 2, and 8 … 10), the
servo modules ( 3 ... 7) the RIK6 module (11) and
the modules of the TMS-2 control system (12) are TMS-2 control system
shown in greater detail in the following. The Trützschler Microcomputer System (TMS-2) is
the central control unit of the card. When an LED is
As a general rule, red LEDs indicate a fault. Green
lit, the corresponding terminal is active.
LEDs normally indicate the normal operation of a
component. The following plug-in boards can be installed in the
TMS-2.
Frequency converters:
– ZPB4 - central processor board
1 Main cylinder drive
– ADB3 - controller board
2 Licker-in drive
– TMB1 - temperature board
Servo modules:
– FTB1 - frequency analysis board
3 Rotary can plate drive
– EBO32 - input board
4 Delivery drive
– ABR16 - output board
5 Doffer drive
– VNB1 - power supply
6 Infeed drive
7 Power supply (supply module)
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 199

Faults
LEDs of the servo modules
SM20 / SM30 / SM 40 servo module
The six LEDs indicate the operating status of the

servo module:
1 Constant green light:
X1 Power supply is on
! 2 Constant green light:

Discharge
Ready for operation
Time Flashing green light:
> 1 Min.
1 2 Controller active
Power Supply Ready H1
Contr. Active
Pulse Blocking SM 3 4 3 Constant yellow light:
Contr. Enabled
Overcurrent
U-Link >
CAN
Pulses blocked, no control pulses
Short/Earth Encoder
X2 5 6 Flashing yellow light:
24V DC 0V DC 12 11 Controller enable and pulses blocked
Enc. B Out Enc. A Out
Dig. Out 0
_ Dig. In 2
Dig. In 1 Dig. In 0 4 Constant red light:
CAN-Termination 2 1
Collective fault message
S1 Flashing red light:
6789 7 DC link voltage over 900 V
ABCD
2 3 45
CAN Address EF01
X3 5 Constant red light:

1 2
Surge current
Flashing red light:
System Bus Short circuit or earth leak
19 20
6 Constant red light:
X4
CAN bus fault
An. In 0+ An. ln 0- 10 9 Flashing red light:
_ _
Analog Out 0 A GND
Rotary transducer fault
Analog Out 1 A GND
Analog Out 2 A GND 2 1
X5
7 Rotary switch for setting the CAN address.
Motor Temp. 16 15 When operating without CAN the address
must be set to 0.
When operating several servo modules via
Encoder
CAN the addresses must all be different.
2 1
Notes
If LEDs 3, 4, 6 and 5 light up cyclically, a
fault has occurred in the control software
of the servo module.
The width of the servo modules can differ,
depending on the motor rated current.
200 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Faults
Servo modules SM10
The six LEDs indicate the operating status of the

servo module:
X1 Power supply is on
! 2 Constant green light:

Discharge
Ready for operation
Time Flashing green light:
> 1 Min.
1 2 Controller active
Power Supply Ready H1
Contr. Active
Pulse Blocking SM 3 4 3 Constant yellow light:
Contr. Enabled
Overcurrent
U-Link >
CAN
Pulses blocked, no control pulses
Short/Earth Encoder
X2 5 6 Flashing yellow light:
24V DC 0V DC 12 11 Controller enable and pulses blocked
Enc. B Out Enc. A Out
Dig. Out 0
_ Dig. In 2
Dig. In 1 Dig. In 0 4 Constant red light:
CAN-Termination 2 1
Collective fault message
S1 Flashing red light:
6789
7 DC link voltage over 900 V
ABCD
2 3 45
CAN Address EF01
X3 5 Constant red light:

1 2
Surge current
Flashing red light:
System Bus Short circuit or earth leak
19 20
X4
CAN bus fault
An. In 0+ An. ln 0- 10 9 Flashing red light:
_ _
Analog Out 0 A GND
Rotary transducer fault
Analog Out 1 A GND
Analog Out 2 A GND 2 1
X5
7 Rotary switch for setting the CAN address.
Motor Temp. 16 15 When operating without CAN the address
must be set to 0.
Encoder
When operating several servo modules via
CAN the addresses must all be different.
2 1
Notes
If LEDs 3, 4, 6 and 5 light up cyclically, a
fault has occurred in the control software
of the servo module.
The width of the servo modules can differ,
depending on the motor rated current.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 201

Faults
SE power supply servo module
The four LEDs indicate the operating status of the

servo module:
Power supply is on
2 Steady green light:

!
Module ready for operation
Discharge
Time
> 1 Min.
H10
1 2 Fault - temperature too high
24V AC Power SE Ready
SE Temp. Chopper 3 4 4 Flashing red:
Braking procedure
X10
24V AC 4
SE - Start
Main Contactor
0V AC 1
X11
1 2
System Bus
19 20
X12
_ 6
_
CAN-H
SHLD
CAN CAN-L
GND 1
202 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Faults
LEDs of the TMS-2 modules
ZPB4 – Central processor board, slot 0
1 R Constant green light:

Normal mode
R Flashing green:
Error in the control software
2 E Constant red light:

System or hardware error
ZPB 4
1 2
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 203

Faults
ADB3 – ADB3 controller board, slot 1
1 R Constant green light:

Internal digital filter operation
2 Z0: Sliver coiling plate pulse

3 Z2: Licker-in pulse
1 7
4 Z4: Deposit pulse
2 ADB 3 8 5 Z6: -
6 Z8: -
3 9
7 E Constant red light: System error
4 10
8 Z1: Main cylinder pulse
5 11 9 Z3: Card feed unit pulse
10 Z5: -
6 12 11 Z7: DFK beater pulse
12 Z9: T-CON contact measurement pulse
204 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Faults
EBO32 – Input board, slot 4
0.0 DFK licker-in cylinder standstill

0.1 Main cylinder rotating
0.2 Licker-in rotating
0.3 DFK rotating
0.4 Service key switch on
0.5 Main cylinder frequency converter ready for
EBO 32 operation
0.0 0.6 Licker-in frequency converter ready for
0.1 operation
0.2 0.7 PFS-M right, position OK
0.3 ERR flashing red: System error
0.4
0.5 1.0 PFS-M left, position OK
0.6 1.1 Flats drive relieved
0.7 1.2 Flats drive monitoring
ERR
1.3 Manual adjustment, flats drive not stop
1.4 Manual adjustment, flats drive forwards
1.0 1.5 Manual adjustment, flats drive backwards
1.1
1.6 PMS-M position OK
1.2
1.3 1.7 -
1.4
1.5 2.0 CM/CA winding monitor delivery rolls
1.6 2.1 -
1.7 2.2 KHC-CA/CC in position 0 = in position
2.3 KHC-CA/CC empty can available
2.4 KHC-CA/CC full can available
2.0 2.5 KHC-CA/CC sliver break
2.1 2.6 KHC-CA/CC squeeze rolls, 1 = OK
2.2 2.7 KHC-CA/CC hood safety mechanism closed
2.3
2.4 3.0 KHC-CM/CA sliver monitoring,
2.5
2.6 1 = darkened
2.7 3.1 CA/CC rotary can plate frequency converter
ready for operation
3.2 T-CON self-test
3.0 3.3 -
3.1 3.4 DFK slide valve open
3.2 3.5 -
3.3 3.6 -
3.4 3.7 -
3.5
3.6
3.7
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 205

Faults
EBO32 – Input board, slot 5
0.0 No fault emergency stop circuit

0.1 External emergency stop
0.2 Doors right
0.3 Doors left
0.4 Emergency stop
0.5 DFK door
EBO 32 0.6 Main cylinder circuit motor protection
0.7 Main cylinder circuit motor protection,
0.0
0.1 1 = OK
0.3
0.4 1.0 Fuse monitoring 24 V AC, 1 = OK
0.5 1.1 -
0.6 1.2 -
0.7 1.3 Comb box open
ERR
1.4 Calendar unit, 1 = OK
1.5 Squeeze rolls right, 1 = OK
1.0 1.6 Squeeze rolls left, 1 = OK
1.1 1.7 Inlet monitoring, 1 = OK
1.2
1.3
1.4 2.0 Metal inlet monitoring, 1 = OK
1.5 2.1 Pressure monitoring, 1 = OK
1.6 2.2 DFK maintenance flap
1.7 2.3 Motor protection switch
material transport 1 = OK
2.4 DFK frequency converter ready, 1 = OK
2.0 2.5 Flats drive frequency converter
2.1 ready, 1 = OK
2.2 2.6 Flats strips suction pressure monitoring,
2.3 1 = OK
2.4 2.7 -
2.5
2.6
3.0 Webfeed Plus pulse
2.7
3.1 Webfeed Plus drive ready for operation
3.2 -
3.3 Test
3.0
3.1 3.4 Key switch off
3.2 3.5 Reversing button
3.3 3.6 -
3.4 3.7 EGS ready for operation
3.5
3.6
3.7
206 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Faults
ABR16 – Output board, slot 6
0.0 LED on: Enable flats drive

0.1 Main cylinder forwards
0.2 Main cylinder backwards
0.3 Licker-in
0.4 LED on: Main cylinder delta contactor,
LED off: Main cylinder star contactor
ABR 16 0.5 Power supply to DFK frequency converter
0.6 Enable PFS-M left and right
0.0
0.1 0.7 Intermittent suction active
0.3
0.4 1.0 LED on: Can bottom enable
0.5 1.1 Cylinder brake off
0.6 1.2 Main cylinder on, door locking on
0.7 1.3 Emergency stop acknowledgement
ERR
1.4 LED on: Flats drive reverse,
LED off: Flats drive forwards
1.0 1.5 Reversing button signal lamp
1.1 1.6 Fan MTT
1.2
1.7 DFK slide valve
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 207

Faults
ABR16 – Output board, slot 7
0.0 LED on: DFK feed roll reverse,

LED off: DFK feed roll forwards
0.1 PMS-M enable
0.2 Fan
0.3 Flats cleaning roll
0.4 LED on: Sliver break
ABR 16 0.5 Can changer
0.0 0.6 Doffer cleaning roll
0.1 0.7 DFK drives
0.3
0.4 1.0 LED on: DFK feed roll enable
0.5 1.1 Red signal lamp test
0.6 1.2 Yellow signal lamp test
0.7 1.3 Green signal lamp test
ERR
1.4 LED on: T-CON self-test
1.5 Funnel valve - blowing
1.0 1.6 Gore gap valve - blowing
1.1
1.7 Valve Webspeed closed
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
208 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Faults
VNB2 – Power Supply, Slot 8
During normal operation, all six LEDs should be lit.
VNB 2
+5V POWER
+12V - 12V
+15V - 15V
RESET
X1
24V~
0V~
PE
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 209

Faults
Frequency converter LEDs

Caution
Risk of malfunctions and destruction of 1 2
electronic modules!
Transfer the position of the coding switch
to the new module before you replace a
defective module.
During operation, the operating status of the fre-
quency converter is indicated by a red (1) and a
green (2) light emitting diode. The respective oper-
ating statuses can be seen in the following table.
LEDs
Operating status
red (1) green (2)
off on Enable frequency converter
on on Mains switched on and automatic start blocked
off flashes slowly Frequency converter blocked
off flashes quickly Motor parameters identification is running
flashes quickly off Undervoltage or overvoltage
flashes slowly off Fault active
210 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Faults
RIK module LEDs
1
8
7
6
5 2
4 MAT.TRANSP.
3 SERVICE EIN
RIK6
2 EIN
1 NOT AUS EIN
AUS
POWER STILLSTAND
LED (1) LED (2)
flashing quickly off on off
8 - MAT.TRANSP. -
7 - Key-switch is set to
SERVICE ON
6 Service ON Service OFF
DFK roll rotating DFK roll stopped
5 Safety circuit is
4 EMER- ON active interrupted

Main cylinder Main cylinder
GENCY
3 rotating stopped ON active interrupted
STOP
2 Licker-in roll Licker-in roll OFF interrupted active
1 rotating stopped STANDSTILL All drives at a at least one

standstill drive rotating
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 211

Faults
Reversing
You can run the drive for the feed roll on the DFK
tuft feeder and the drive for the feed roll on the card
backwards (= reversing) to remove heavy soiling, Service mode
Reversing
for instance.
M 103 DFK feed unit drive
M 111 Card feed unit drive
1. Activate service mode using the key switch
(see page 214).
2. Select Reversing.
3. Select a drive.
Power BAE 4
4. Start the drive

or
reverse in jog mode.
The drive runs in reverse for a certain amount of

time and then stops.
212 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
Maintenance
This chapter describes measures which keep the DANGER
machine in or restore it to proper condition. In this Risk of injury from modification work on
operating and service manual servicing, inspection the machine!
and repair work all counts as maintenance. Only carry out modifications to the
machine or its components after consul-
As owner of the machine, ensure that only qualified
tation with Trützschler after-sales ser-
personnel are employed to carry out maintenance
vice. Otherwise major malfunctions may
work on the machine.
occur causing serious personal injury
Install and activate all protective and safety instal- and irreparable machine damage.
lations correctly after all maintenance work.
Work on the machine going beyond the operations Servicing
described in the chapter Maintenance may only be
carried out by Trützschler after-sales service per- Servicing work involves periodically repeated
sonnel or by persons authorised by Trützschler. checks of the actual condition of the machine.
In certain circumstances inspection requires main-
tenance work to be carried out in order to keep the
machine in proper condition at least until the next
inspection.
Inspection intervals
The following table shows recommendations for
inspection work on the card. The page is a cross
reference to the description of the work.
Inspection interval in hours

Task Page
4000 as required
Check the tension of all belts x 216
Check the pneumatics x 226
Check the motors x 227
Check the drives x 228
Check the valves x 226
Check the TC 07 SENSOFEED ICFD value x 221
Check the TC 06 EASYFEED ICFD value x 222
Check the T-CON x 223
Check the clothings x a) 229

a)
The tables for clothing servicing start on page 266.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 213

Maintenance
Service mode
Caution
Risk of malfunctions and destruction of
assembly groups!
Service mode is provided for authorised
service staff only.
Clothing servicing for cylinders, revolving flats and
doffers as well as drives and pneumatic valves can
be carried out in this mode. You can also test the
can changer. You can carry out PFS-M servicing or
PMS-M servicing depending on the machine equip-
ment.
Switching on service mode

1. Open the housing door (1) above the master
switch.
2. Turn the key switch for service mode from the
0 position to the I position.
The symbol for service mode (a hand on a blue
background) appears on the top row of the touch
screen.
You can switch the selected components on and off
using the start and stop keys as described. You can
also use the jog key in order to just quickly test the
components.
To end service mode you must switch the key
switch in the control cabinet back from I to 0.
A range of buttons featuring the symbols of the
respective components are to be found on various
pages of the touch screen display, e. g. Motor test
or Test drives. The buttons can show three differ-
ent statuses:
grey: Components available for selection
blue: Component is selected
yellow: Component is in operation
214 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
Service menu
The following service menu is displayed once you
have activated service mode with the service key
switch:
Cotton
Service mode
Service functions
Flats service
Grinding
Reversing
Valve test
Motor test
Test drives
– Either select the desired

service function directly,
– or scroll to the desired service

function.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 215

Maintenance
Checking and setting belt tension

Check the tension of all belts approximately every Notes
4000 operating hours. If necessary, clean the belt before mea-
suring. Strike the belt with your thumb or
The tension of the belt is assessed indirectly from
a blunt object and use the measuring
the free running part of the belt's own frequency
device as described in the manufac-
measurement.
turer's instructions.
Carry out the measurement in the middle
of the belt. This is indicated by tips of the
arrows in the following drawings.
If you have fitted a new belt, check the
tension of the belt once more two days
later.
Flat belt
* 1)
* 2)
* 3)
76 Hz 53 Hz 88 Hz
Measuring point Belt type Oscillation frequency [Hz]
B85-GT6P 168
*1)
F-1 151
B85-GT14P 145
*2)
S-250H 123
B85-GT14P 142
*3)
S-250H 123
216 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
Toothed belt, single-motor web doffer
105 Hz
59 Hz
108 Hz 49 Hz 69 Hz
Toothed belt, dual-motor web doffer
89 Hz
39 Hz
34 Hz 71 Hz 49 Hz 69 Hz
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 217

Maintenance
Setting the belt tension
After replacing a belt or during maintenance work,

you must reset the tension of the belt. Using an
adjustable tension roller, you can loosen the belts 1 2 3
in order to replace them and set the belt tension.
The respective belt is tensioned by the draw or the
pressure from the tension roller (1). Adjust belt ten-
sion as follows:
1. Unscrew the fixing nut (2).
2. Adjust the belt tension by turning the tension
nut (3).
3. Check the belt tension.
4. Fix the tension roller in place with the fixing
nut (2).
218 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
Measuring and setting the tension on the flats transport belt
1 2
5 4 3
1. Remove the left-hand main collector

2. Push the suspension lever (6) into the flat
pin (4) which is in the centre of the setting
plate (2).
3. Attach the spring balance (1) to the suspen-
sion lever.
4. Push a 0.1 mm gauge (5) under the flat pin
and brace it.
5. Pull the spring balance upwards far enough
for allow the gauge to be removed easily.
6. Read the value from the scale dial (7).
The value must be 17 ... 20 N.
7. If necessary, set the belt tension using the
threaded spindles (3) on both sides.
8. Check that the upper flats are horizontal with
a spirit level.
9. If necessary, adjust the position of the flats
with the threaded pins and repeat the measur-
ing process.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 219

Maintenance
Checking the setpoints of the pneumatic connections

You can read the setpoints for the pneumatic con-
nections on the Valve test page on the touch
2
screen (Service mode). Compare the actual val-
ues on the pressure gauges (1 and 2) to the set-
points displayed on this page of the touch screen
with a grey background. The pressure gauges are
situated behind the maintenance door at the front
on the right-hand side in the machine.
1. Activate service mode using the key switch.
2. Select Valve test. 1
3. Compare the value on the lower pressure

gauge (1) with the setpoint (3) on the touch
screen.
4. Compare the value on the upper pressure
gauge (2) with the setpoint (4).
Y 454 Funnel feeler lever (3)

3 4
Y 452 Suction funnel gore (4)
Service mode
Valve test
Power BAE 4
220 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
Checking the ICFD value (TC 07 SENSOFEED)

Note
These checks are only necessary if you
Service mode
have changed the position of the feed
Valve test
plate or have replaced the plunger.
If you wish to check the ICFD value, you must run
the card with no material.
2. Select Valve test.
The setpoint is displayed with a grey background

as item (1) on the touch screen. The actual value is Power BAE 4
displayed on a white background:

1
ICFD 0.5 mm
If this value deviates you must adjust the position of
the plunger as follows: 2
plunger (2) until the actual value 0.5 mm is
displayed on the touch screen.
Caution
Risk of destroying the plunger.
4. Lightly tighten the headless screw (3) to
secure the plunger.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 221

Maintenance
Checking the ICFD value (TC 06 EASYFEED)

Note
These checks are only necessary if you
have changed the position of the feed Service mode
Valve test
plate or have replaced the plunger.
If you wish to check the ICFD value, you must run
the card with no material.
2. Select Valve test.
The setpoint is displayed with a grey background in

position (1) on the touch screen. The actual values Power BAE 4
are displayed on a white background:

1
ICFD 0.5 mm
In case of deviations from this setpoint value you
must correct the positions of the plungers (2) on the 2
left and right-hand sides of the machine as follows:
plunger (2) until the actual value 0.5 mm is
displayed on the touch screen.
Caution
Risk of destroying the plungers.
4. Lightly tighten the headless screw (3) to
secure the plunger.
222 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
Checking the T-CON

2. Select Motor test.
3. Press the T-CON button (1).

1
There are two possible causes of the fault:
Fault due to a contact Service mode

– Text field Monitoring is red Motor test T-CON – Test
– Text field Contact is red

This fault can be triggered even when the cylinder
Monitoring
is still stationary, e. g. by a small piece of wire. no contact
In order to eliminate this contact, you have to
remove the components of the cylinder one by one
until both text fields switch to a green background.
1. Clean any metal parts from the functional ele-
ments.
2. Check the carding gap and if necessary, set a
larger or more even carding gap.
Fault due to a carbon pin

– Text field Monitoring is red
– Text field Contact is green
1. Replace the carbon pins, see page 224.
The two text fields can be shown in the following
combinations:
Monitoring green
There is no contact – the measuring system in OK.
no contact green
Monitoring red There is no contact – the carbon pin is worn.

no contact green The T-CON electronics are faulty. 1)
Monitoring green
The T-CON electronics are faulty. 1)
Contact red
Monitoring red There is a contact between the cylinder clothing and another element.
You will find instructions on how to remedy this situation in the section
Contact red
Fault due to a contact above.
The T-CON electronics are faulty. 1)
1)
Carry out the T-CON hardware test, see page 225.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 223

Maintenance
Replacing the carbon pin
The T-CON housing is situated on the left-hand

side of the machine on the cylinder axle.
1. Unscrew and remove the supply cable (2) and
the earthing cable (3) on the T-CON unit.
2. Unscrew the three screws (1) on the T-CON 1
housing and remove the housing.
3. Unscrew and remove the used carbon pin (4)

and replace it with a new carbon pin.
4. Screw the T-CON housing in place with the
three screws.
5. Reconnect the supply cable and the earthing
cable on the T-CON unit.
224 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
Testing the T-CON hardware

1. Press the T-CON button (1).
Service mode
2. Start the test by pressing the start key (2). Motor test T-CON – Test
The text fields Test (A4:E3.2) and Test (A1:Z9)

must then be displayed with a green background.
In this case the hardware test has been successful.
2 Power BAE 4
1
The two text fields can be shown in the following
combinations:
Test (A4:E3.2) green

The measuring system is OK.
Test (A1:Z9) green
Test (A4:E3.2) green

The T-CON electronics are faulty.
Test (A1:Z9) red
Test (A4:E3.2) red

Test (A1:Z9) green
Test (A4:E3.2) red

Test (A1:Z9) red
Two LEDs (3) and (4) are integrated in the T-CON

housing in addition to the text fields on the touch
screen in order to signal the status of the T-CON
unit. The LED colours have the following signifi-
cance: 3
LED lights up green lights up red

(3) Electric circuit OK Short circuit 4
(4) Carbon pin OK Break on carbon pin
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 225

Maintenance
Checking the valves

On this touch screen you can test all the card's Y 310 Slide valve (optional)
pneumatic valves and the signal lamp.
Y 452 Suction funnel gore (blowing)
Y 453 Webspeed
Y 454 Funnel feeler lever (blowing)
Y 679 Sliver cutter
Service mode
Valve test
Power BAE 4
Check the valves as follows: Check the indicator lamp as follows:
1. Select Valve test. 1. Select Valve test.
2. Select valve. 2. Select the colour.
3. Switch on the valve and check 3. Switch on the colour segment

that it is functioning, i. e. com- and check the indicator lamp.
pare the displayed value with
the actual value. 4. Switch off the colour segment.
4. Switch off the valve.

5. Carry out the test for the other colours too.
226 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
Checking the motors

To check the sense of rotation you can switch the M 102 Opening roll and DFK fan
motors on and off if their symbol is displayed on the
M 104 MTT fan
touch screen. Motors, whose symbols are dis-
played with an arrow on the left-hand side, can also M 115 The card's opening roll
be run backwards (reversing).
M 121 Main cylinder
M 131 Strips roll
M 144 Doffer's stripper cleaning roll
M 182 Can changer's turnstile
T-CON T-CON contact measurement self-test
Service mode
Motor test
Power BAE 4
Check the sense of rotation of the motors as fol- or:

lows:
1. Select Reversing.
1. Select Motor test.
2. Select motor reverse.
2. Select motor forwards.
3. Start motor and check sense
3. Start motor. of direction.
4. Stop motor. The drive runs in reverse for a certain amount of

time and then stops.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 227

Maintenance
Checking the drives

You can change the speed of the drives shown on M 103 Tuft feeder feed unit
this touch screen using the buttons in order to
M 111 Card feed unit
check how motors used to convey material are
working together, based on the quality of sliver M 142 Doffer
being produced.
M 143 Delivery
M 105 Can rotary plate
M 174 Deposit
Service mode
Test drives
Power BAE 4
Check the drives as follows:
1. Select Test drives.
2. Select a drive.
3. Set the speed as a percentage

of the maximum speed.
4. Start the drive and compare

the displayed speed with the
actual value.
5. Stop the drive.
228 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
Checking the clothings

In the following you will see illustrated examples of
the card's clothings which are to help you judge the
clothings.
Caution
Risk of malfunctions and destruction of
clothings!
Clothings must only be fitted and ground
by qualified specialists. Only those grind-
ing devices which have been provided
especially for individual clothings must be
used for grinding.
Condition of the flats clothing

Worn clothing tips with clearly rounded wire tips:
New clothing tips with sharp wire tips and defined

ground section:
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 229

Maintenance
The clothing tips shown here (both illustrations)

have been enlarged 100 x to emphasise the details
better. With a magnifying glass with a strength of
30x or more and a little experience, you can judge
the condition of a clothing.
Using a magnifying glass with a strength of 30x or
more, you can see from the example on the right
that the clothing tips are worn and must be acti-
vated.
The clothing tips have been sharpened and have a

sharp wire tip. The clearance produced by grinding
is not as defined as that of the new clothing tip.
Condition of the main cylinder clothing

The clothing tip is worn and rounded, the wire tip
surface is more or less polished. Grinding grooves,
as appear in the next illustration, cannot be seen.
The grinding grooves from the grinding stone can

clearly be seen on the re-sharpened edge of the
wire.
230 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
Condition of the doffer clothing

The clothing tip is worn and rounded. The tip sur-
face is polished, grinding grooves can no longer be
seen so that on the doffer, fibres are not transferred
and the web is not held as effectively.
Grinding grooves can be seen over the entire sur-

face of the sharpened clothing tip.
Condition of the licker-in clothing

The marks on the wire's leading edge are clearly
recognisable in comparison with the rear edge of
the wire. In some cases the wire tip in the upper
area can also become detached.
In contrast, the wire of a new licker-in clothing:
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 231

Maintenance
Condition of the licker-in's pre-opening

segment
Here too the marks on the wire's leading edge are
clearly recognisable in comparison with the rear
edge of the wire:
In contrast, the wire of a new clothing:
Condition of fixed flats clothings

The marks on the lead edge on the worn wire and
the roundedness of the wire tip are clearly visible:
In contrast, the wire of a new clothing:
232 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
Maintenance
The maintenance work carried out on the card General cleaning instructions
should make sure that the machine is kept in Adhere to the following basic cleaning instructions:
proper condition for as long as possible.
Caution
DANGER Possible destruction of surfaces!
Risk of injury from drives, rotating parts Do not use cleaning agents or any other
and belts! additives for cleaning purposes.
Switch the machine off before carrying
out maintenance work. Do not start any – Allow the main cylinder to run for approxi-
maintenance work until the machine has mately 10 minutes after switching off the
been disconnected from the power sup- material transport in order to run the flats area
ply and all rolls have come to a standstill. to empty.
Secure the master switch in the OFF – Vacuum off any fibre fly, preferably using and
position by means of a padlock and a industrial vacuum cleaner, so that the dirt can-
warning sign or by other suitable means not be spread.
to prevent unauthorised switching on.
– For metal surfaces use a plastic scouring pad
DANGER or a soft brass brush.
Possible serious injuries from drives, – You can wipe plastic and ceramics with a
rotating parts and belts! damp cloth.
Some maintenance work has to be car-
ried out with the drives running. – Remove fibres, coatings and abrasion from
Make sure that nobody is situated in the toothed wheels and toothed belts with a soft
dangerous areas of the machine. brass brush as required. Transport the
Wear close-fitting clothing and keep it toothed belts further by hand as necessary.
buttoned and tucked in at all times. Staff – Clean pipes with a suitable, flexible brush
with long hair must wear a hair net. Do without a metal centre or draw a long cloth
not touch the rolls with your hand. with a suitable knot through the pipes.
– Clean soiled aluminium surfaces of flaps and
hoods with a cleaning cloth and warm water.
Dry the cleaned surfaces afterwards thor-
oughly with a dry cloth, otherwise the material
will corrode.
– Open doors which are electrically locked
before you switch off and secure the master
switch.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 233

Maintenance
Maintenance and cleaning schedule

The following table shows recommendations for Note
maintenance depending on the operating hours of For materials with a high content of adhe-
the card. The number (No.) indicates the assembly sive substances or with a high level of
group of the machine on which maintenance work soiling, the 120 hour interval is reduced
is carried out. The page is a cross reference to the to 24 hours.
description of the work. Examples:
Recycled material, flax and staple
lengths < 7 mm and > 60 mm
Frequency in hours
No. Task Page
120 500 2000 8000
– Clean all suction hoods x 235
1 Clean tuft feeder x 237
2 Clean feed table x 242
3 Clean flat strips roll x 244
4 Clean revolving flats area x 246
6 Clean doffer section x 247
8 Clean the web doffing section x 250
5 Clean cylinder covers x 253
7 Clean the web doffer channel connector x 254
– Replace the delivery rolls belt x 251
– TC-CI compressor (optional) x 258
– TC-FB filter box (optional) 259
– TC-TS transverse web delivery belt (optional) 260
– WEBFEED Plus (optional) 261
2 3 4
7
1
234 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
Cleaning all suction hoods
1. Switch off the material transport and all

drives. Switch off the master switch and lock it
with a padlock to prevent it from being
switched back on.
2. Check the transparent suction ducts (1) on
the left-hand side of the machine for internal
build-up of fibres.
3. If the suction ducts are soiled, remove the
suction ducts from the connecting sockets,
vacuum and wipe out with a damp cloth.
4. Rub the suction ducts dry internally or leave to
dry.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 235

Maintenance
5. Vacuum suction hoods and wipe out the entire

interior surface with a damp cloth.
6. Rub the dampened surfaces dry or leave to
dry.
7. Fit the suction ducts back on.
Example of a suction hoods with connecting sock-
ets on the left-hand side of the machine:
8. Remove / unscrew the suction ducts on the

right-hand side of the machine too and wipe
out with a damp cloth.
9. Replace / screw back on all suction ducts.
Example of a screw-fitted suction duct on the right-
hand side of the machine:
236 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
Cleaning the DFK tuft feeder

Upper trunk
1. Switch off the material transport and all drives.
Open all electrically locked doors and flaps. 1
Switch off the master switch and secure to
prevent it from being switched back on using
a padlock. 2
2. Open the upper housing cover on the tuft
feeder upwards.
3. Clean air outlet openings (1, 2 and 3) on the
upper trunk.
The air outlet is either fitted with an adjustable 3
sheet-metal insert (2) or a needle comb (3)
depending on the model.
4. Using the snap locks (4 and 5), open the per-

forated plate downwards.
5. Vacuum the perforated plate.
6. Vacuum clean the trunk to the feed roll from
above.
7. Close the perforated plate so that it clicks into
place in the snap locks.
Note
Instructions for settings for the transport
air outlet filter can be found on page 114.
4 5
8. Remove the air hoses on both sides of the

fan. 6 7
9. Pull both spring-loaded stop bolts (6 and 7)

and raise the housing flap together with the
fan.
The flap is held in the upper position by pneu-
matic springs.
10. Check the transparent fan's connecting hous-
ing and the fan blades for soiling - If neces-
sary, unscrew the housing and remove fibres
and sticky deposits.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 237

Maintenance
11. Check the feed roll (1) for soiling and vacuum
clean off any fibre deposits. Pay particular
attention to the areas between the roll ends
and the walls of the housing. 1
12. Remove soiling within the blow trunk (2) by

vacuuming or wiping with a damp cloth.
13. Afterwards rub aluminium surfaces dry.
Lower trunk
1. Remove hoses (3 and 4) from the WEBFEED
waste collectors.
2. Undo both knurled screws (5) on the service
flap of the lower trunk and place the flap on 3
the control cabinet.
3. Check the lower trunk for fibre build-up and
sticky deposits and remove any soiling within
the trunk with a vacuum cleaner.
5 4
238 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
Caution
Risk of destroying the pressure sensor!
Do not blow out the lower trunk with com-
pressed air!
4. If the inside of the pressure hose is soiled,
remove the hose from the pressure sensor (1)
1
and blow out in the direction of the lower
trunk.
5. Connect hoses to the SENSOFEED waste
collectors, direct them backwards and place
them on the control cabinet.
Clean the lower trunk
Note
This maintenance work only has to be
carried out every 500 operating hours.
The hoses are disconnected from the fan and the 2
SENSOFEED, the fan has been raised, the service
flap of the lower trunk is locked.
1. Unfasten the knurled screws (2) on the left
and right of the lower trunk and shift them
both outwards (3).
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 239

Maintenance
2. Hold the filter trunk firmly in place above and

unlock on both sides using the stop bolts (1) 1
and place the trunk on the control cabinet.
3. Vacuum the front side (2) of the trunk.
4. Lift the complete trunk backwards out of the

housing and place it on the control cabinet.
5. Vacuum connecting surfaces (3) and wipe 3
with a damp cloth.
240 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
6. Then allow the lower trunk to glide into the

retainer section (2) with the bearing studs (1).
1
7. Raise the lower trunk and allow the stop

bolts (3) to snap into place on both sides.
8. Shift the knurled screws (4) on the left and

right into the groove on the housing of the
4
lower trunk and screw them in place.
9. Lower the fan. Connect the hoses to the
sockets on the WEBFEED and the fan.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 241

Maintenance
Opening roll, cleaning

1. Unfasten the fastening screws (1) on both
sides of the service flap.
DANGER
Risk of injury from the sharp needles on
the opening roll.
Use protective gloves for cleaning the
area around the opening roll.
2. Lower the opening roll service flap (3).
3. Take particular care to remove twists of fibre,
2
fibre build-up and sticky deposits from the
opening roll near to the walls of the
housing (2).
4. Wipe the inside of the service flap with a 3
damp cloth and rub dry.
5. Then raise the flap and lock in place with two
screws.
Cleaning the comb boxes in the feed table
Note
The material transport has to be switched
off to carry out this work - the cylinder can
be allowed to continue to run.
1. Press the stop key to bring the material trans-
port to a halt.
2. Open the safety locking bar as far as it will go.
242 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
3. Release the hook (1) on the handle of the

suction hood.
1
4. Pull the suction hood and comb box upwards.

2
5. Allow the suction hood to lower at the back
and snap into place.
6. Check both comb boxes (2 and 3) for residue 3
and sticky deposits.
7. Remove any loose tuft material. Wipe all fibre
carrying areas with a damp cloth.
8. Pull the stop bolt (4) to unlock the suction

hood and the comb box.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 243

Maintenance
9. Pull the suction hood and comb box back into

the operating position and allow the hook (1)
on the handle of the suction hood to engage. 1
10. Pivot the safety locking bar back into the initial
position so that it snaps into position in the
safety switch (2).
Cleaning the flat strips roll

1. Switch off the material transport and all drives. 4
3
Open all electrically locked doors and flaps.
a padlock.
2. Unlock the stop bolt (4) on the left-hand side
of the machine and open the suction hood (3)
on the flats cleaning unit.
244 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
3. Vacuum away any fibre build-up in the suction

hood (1) and wipe with a damp cloth to
remove sticky deposits; then rub the alumin-
ium surfaces dry.
4. Close the suction hood and allow the stop bolt
to engage.
5. Open the service flap (2) to the slow-running

flat strips roll. 2
6. Check the roll (3) for deposits of fibres and

vacuum clean as necessary.
7. Close the service flap.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 245

Maintenance
Cleaning revolving flats area

1
a padlock.
2. Check the entire interior area (1) of the revolv-
ing flat for fibre build-up and vacuum clean.
3. Vacuum the rubber flats cover (3). In case of

heavy soiling, unscrew it, fold it up and 3 4
remove it from the interior area of the flat.
4. Wipe down the rubber flat cover.
5. Clean the area around the drive axis (2) par-
ticularly thoroughly.
6. If necessary, unfasten the flats cover on both
sides of the machine with the screws (4),
remove it from the flats area and wipe off with 2
a damp cloth.
7. Comb out the cup brush (5).
246 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
Cleaning the doffer section
Clean the clothing
DANGER
Possible serious injury from rotating
doffer!
Do not use the doffer clothing to hold on
to. For cleaning purposes, use a hand-
held scraper with a brass clothing only.
1. Activate service mode using the key switch
(see page 214).
1
2. Open the upper service flap (1) on the doffer
and check for build-up of fibres; wipe off sticky
deposits with a damp cloth and then rub dry.
3. Select Test drives in service

mode.
4. Select M 142 for the doffer
drive.
5. Start drive motors.
6. Increase the drive speed to

approximately 50 % of the
nominal value.
7. Remove foreign bodies using a handheld

brass scraper.
8. To do so, hold the hand-held scraper flat on
one of the roll ends for approximately two roll
revolutions. Move the hand-held scraper step
by step until you reach the opposite end of the
roll.
9. Press the stop key.
10. Close the service flap on the doffer.
11. Deactivate service mode using the key
switch.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 247

Maintenance
Cleaning the lower cover sections
Note
This work is due to be carried out approx-
imately every 500 working hours.
a padlock.
2. Unfasten and remove the wing screws on the
cover plates (1).
Caution
Possible damages to the clothing!
Always work in pairs when disassembling
and assembling the cover sections.
Otherwise the edge of a cover section
may damage the clothing.
3. Working as a pair, unscrew the rear cover
sections (2) below the doffer on both sides of
the machine.
4. Wipe off the insides of the cover sections with
a damp cloth and rub dry.
5. Vacuum the accessible areas of the doffer
clothing. 2
6. Working as a pair, unscrew each of the front

cover sections (3) below the doffer on both
sides of the machine.
7. Wipe off the insides of the sections and all
fibre carrying areas with a damp cloth and rub
dry.
Note
To remove the upper cover section, you
must remove the card's front panel and
the front waste funnel:
3
248 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
8. Remove the card's front cover plate.
9. Pull out the stop bolts (1) to unlock the

mounts.
10. Remove the waste funnel towards the front,
remove soiling and wipe with a damp cloth.
Caution
Possible damages to the clothing!
may slightly damage the clothing.
11. Unscrew and remove the nuts (2) from the
upper front cover section below the doffer and
remove the cover section.
2
12. Wipe the insides of the cover section with a
damp cloth and vacuum clean the accessible
areas of the doffer clothing.
13. Rub the cleaned cover section dry, screw it
back on, insert the collecting funnel and
secure the front panel.
14. Replace the cover plates on both sides of the
machine and secure using the wing screws.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 249

Maintenance
Cleaning the web doffing section

1
DANGER
Risk of serious crushing!
When the cover flap is open, long hair or
loose items of clothing may become
entangled in the rotating rolls.
Wear close-fitting clothing and keep it
buttoned and tucked in at all times. Staff
with long hair must wear a hair net. Do
not touch the rolls with your hand.
2. Open the spoiler section (1) outwards, vac-
uum clean, wipe with a damp cloth and rub
dry.
3. Close the spoiler section so it is back in the
initial position.
4. Open the WEBSPEED (2) by pressing the

button.
5. Thoroughly remove all fibre material from the

interior of the WEBSPEED.
6. Wipe off the components which come into
contact with the web using a damp cloth and
then rub dry.
250 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
7. Open up the measuring funnel using the hand

lever (3). 2 3
8. Remove any twists or other deposits of fibres 1
from the delivery rolls (1).
9. Vacuum clean the end of the measuring fun-
nel and remove stubborn soiling.
10. Vacuum clean the pinion, toothed belts and

adjoining areas (4).
11. Lower the measuring funnel, push the
WEBSPEED down until the lock clicks in
place.
Replacing the delivery rolls belt

1. Unfasten the locking screw (5) for the tension
roller (7) and the adjusting screw (6) to take 6
the load off the toothed belt.
2. Remove the belt and fit a new belt to the deliv- 5
ery rolls.
3. Set the belt tension as stipulated (see
page 217) with the adjusting screw (6) and
secure in place with the locking screw (5).
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 251

Maintenance
Cleaning the guiding profile

a padlock.
2. Unfasten the guiding profile (2) on the left-
hand side of the machine using the screw 1
handle (1).
3. Pull the guiding profile (3) horizontally out of

the card.
4. Vacuum clean the edges.
3
5. Wipe all surfaces which come into contact to
the material with a damp cloth and rub dry.
6. Then shift the guiding profile as far as it will go
into the card and secure using the screw han-
dle.
252 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
Cleaning the main cylinder covers

Open all electrically locked doors and flaps. 1
a padlock.
2. Remove both lower suction ducts (3) and the
suction hose (2) from the main collector (1).
Caution
Risk of damage to the clothing!
may slightly damage the clothing.
3
2
Note
Mark the cover sections with consecutive
numbers so that you can keep them in
the same order when re-installing.
3. Working as a pair, unscrew each of the cover
sections (4) below the main cylinder on both
4. To remove the front cover sections on both
sides of the machine, unscrew the plate (5).
5. Wipe off the insides of the sections and all
fibre carrying areas with a damp cloth.
6. Replace the cleaned sections, screw on the
cover plate (5) and attach both lower suction 4 5
ducts (3) and the suction hose (2) to the main
collector.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 253

Maintenance
Cleaning the channel connector

The card is switched off at the master switch and
secured to prevent it from being switched back on.
1. Open the front housing doors and open the
front flap upwards.
2. Unfasten the fastening screws (1 and 2) on

the left and right-hand front sections of hous-
ing.
3. Open the front sections of housing forwards.

Beware of the pneumatic hoses when handling
the right-hand section of housing.
4. Disconnect all the suction ducts.
5. Remove the holder for the suction hood (3).
254 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
6. Unscrew and remove the four screws (1) on

the upper section of housing. 1
7. Working as a pair with another person, lift off
the upper section of housing and place it
down.
8. Unfasten the motor base plate (3) and remove

the drive belt (2) from the cleaning roll. 2 3
9. Mark the radial position of the cleaning roll on

both sides of the machine with a felt pen (4)
and unscrew and remove the bottom
screw (5) from the fastening plate.
10. Carefully lift out and put aside the cleaning
roll.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 255

Maintenance
11. Unscrew and remove the supports (1) for the

suction hoods on both sides of the machine.
1
12. Unscrew and remove the four screws (2) on

the channel connector on both sides.
256 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
13. Gradually pull out the channel connector (1),

making sure not to tilt it.
Caution
Risk of damage to the stripper roll!
Avoid contact with the stripper roll and
1
clean the clothing on the stripper roll with
compressed air only. A steel brush will
cause scratches on the electrolyte pol-
ished clothing, which in turn may cause
lapping on the roll.
14. Brush off any material build-up from the profile

by hand. Clean the surfaces with a cleaning
cloth and water and then rub them dry.
15. Rub the surfaces of the profile which come
into contact with the material, with talcum
powder.
Caution
Possible damage to assembly groups in
the doffer section!
When assembling adhere to the stipu-
lated gap dimensions in the Settings
chapter on page 124.
16. Re-insert the channel connector and re-
assemble the web doffer in reverse order.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 257

Maintenance
Servicing the TC-CI compressor
2 3
The optional TC-CI compressor (1) is used as a

blowing device for the output measuring funnel.
The compressor is in operation as soon as the
main cylinder rotates.
Maintain the compressor and the air filter as fol-
lows:
1. Stop the machine with the stop key. Deacti-
vate the master switch and secure it with a 5
padlock so that it cannot be switched back on.
2. Open the middle door on the left-hand side of
the machine.
3. Twist off the fly on the protective hood (3) of
the filter.
4. Remove the protective hood and the filter ele-
ment (2).
5. Fit a new filter element.
6. Fit the protective hood and secure it in place
with the fly nut.
7. Unscrew and remove the casing cover (4).
8. Replace the complete set of sliding elements
(5) with new sliding elements.
9. Replace the housing cover to close the com-
pressor.
10. Close the card door.
258 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
Cleaning the TC-FB filter box

The optional TC-FB filter box is a separate filter unit
which can be fitted with intermittent waste suction
or with a manual waste removal system. With the 2
manual version the filter box must be checked and
manually emptied at intervals of 5 ... 20 minutes
depending on the rate of production. The version
with mechanical suction has the additional suction
pipe (2).
Proceed as follows to empty manually:
1. Open the lock (3) on the triangular door with a 1
3
square and open the door by the handle (1)
firmly.
2. Brush the diagonally positioned filter plate
with the hand and remove the material within
15 seconds – the card's material transport will
switch off after 15 seconds.
After a period of one year you must check the fan
wheel and the regulating flap in the fan and remove 4
any deposits of material:
3. Run the card to empty and switch off the card

at the master switch.
8
DANGER
Risk of crushing the hand on rotating
impeller wheel.
The fan's impeller wheel continues to
rotate even after the power has been
switched off. Wait a few minutes before 7
opening the filter box.
4. Unscrew and remove the triangular plate (4).
5. Check that the regulator plate can move
freely (5) and clean it.
6. Unscrew and open the left-hand door of the
filter box.
7. Blow the impeller wheel clean with a com-
pressed air hose through the cleaning 6 5
hole (6).
8. Re-fit the triangular plate.
For more extensive cleaning work you can remove
the exhaust air duct (8) by unfastening the
screws (7) and removing the exhaust air duct from
the filter box towards the front.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 259

Maintenance
Servicing the TC-TS transverse web delivery belt

The optional TC-TS transverse web delivery belt is
designed especially for processing short-staple
material and is a replacement for the WEBSPEED.
1 2 3
Frequency in hours
No. Task
170 4000 8000
2 Clean material residue from the round belt drive. x
1, 4 Clean residue material from the outside of the transverse web

x
delivery belt.
1 Clean residue material from all support rollers for transverse

x
belts.
- Check the round belt for wear and replace it as necessary

x
(see table Expendable parts starting on page 319).
4 Check the transverse belts for wear and replace them as neces-
x
sary (see table Expendable parts starting on page 319).
3 Check the drive belts for wear and replace as necessary. x
260 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
Servicing the WEBFEED Plus

The WEBFEED Plus licker-in unit with opener and
clearer is optionally available for the TC 07.
3
2
1 2nd licker-in roll

2 Clearer
3 Beater
WEBFEED Plus belt tension

Check the tension of all belts approximately every Note
4000 operating hours. If necessary, clean the belt before mea-
suring. Strike the belt with your thumb or
The tension of the belt is assessed indirectly from
a blunt object and use the measuring
the free running part of the belt's own frequency
device as described in the manufac-
measurement.
turer's instructions.
100 Hz
158 Hz
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 261

Maintenance
1. Take measurements in the middle of each belt

as indicated by the arrow heads in the draw-
ing.
2. Check belt tension again two days after fitting
a new belt.
Gap dimensions for opener and clearer
1/1000 inch
mm
= Setting point
= Inspection point
0,3 12 0,3 12 1,3 52
0,3 12
II III
1,3 52 I
0,175 7 0,175 7
262 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
Maintenance / repair
Repair work on the card is performed to restore the
machine to its proper condition.
DANGER .
Risk of injury from drives, rotating parts
and belts!
Switch the machine off before carrying
out maintenance and repair work. Do not
start any maintenance or repair work until
the machine has been disconnected from
the power supply and all rolls have come
to a standstill.
Secure the master switch in the off posi-
tion using a padlock and a warning sign
to prevent it from being switched back on.
Make sure that nobody is situated in the
dangerous areas of the machine.
Caution
When re-starting, material left caught in
the machine can call serious damage.
Allow the main cylinder to run for approx-
imately 10 minutes after switching off the
material transport in order to run the flats
area to empty.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 263

Maintenance
Different clothing types

The doffer can be fitted with different types of cloth-
ing:
– Type (1) features what is known as an
"enhanced point" and is recognisable as a
"beak" under the magnifying glass.
This type of clothing must only be gently acti- 1
vated and must under no circumstances be
ground.
– Type [2] has a normal wire tip and may be
ground.
Caution
Risk destroying the clothing! 2
Check the wire tips of the doffer with a
clothing magnifying glass before you
carry out a grinding service.
Activating and grinding

In order to ensure the quality of the product, the
clothings have to be conditioned after a certain
amount of material has been processed. Both of
the following methods can be used for conditioning:
Activating
Activation of a clothing is a light grinding which
wears off a minimum of material from the clothing
tips. In most cases cylinder and doffer clothings are
activated using the TC-GD traversing grinding
device and not ground.
Grinding
When grinding a clothing considerably more mate-
rial is worn off than when activating. Thus a rotating
grinding roll, fitted with a coarse-grained grinding
belt, can be used to grind the flats clothing,
instance.
The following tables show recommendations for
activating and grinding the card clothings depend-
ing on the material processed by the card. The
number (No.) indicates the position of the roll in the
machine.
264 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
Information on the following tables

All the specifications in the table are recommenda-
tions. You can only determine the correct time for
grinding by using a clothing magnifying glass.
Use the clothing magnifying glass both before and
after grinding in order to determine the exact num-
ber of passages over the cylinder clothings and
doffer clothing, and the correct number of revolu-
tions when grinding the flats clothings.
Note
When grinding cylinder clothings and dof-
fer clothings, one passage is the move-
ment of the transversing grindstone from
one edge of the clothing to the other, and
back again.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 265

Maintenance
Service intervals for standard clothings
Clothing service intervals for 100 % combed cotton (standard clothings)
Note
Spun-dyed or matted fibres can consider-
ably shorten the operational life of the
clothing.
The intervals are valid for standard cloth-
ings only.
The markings ("x" and "o") indicate the type of
clothing service required after the amount of pro-
cessed material has been reached in each case:
"x" means activate or grind the clothing
"o" means replace the clothing
Standard clothing Material processed in tonnes

No.
Cotton 70 140 210 280 350 700 1800 3200
Cylinder x x x x o 6
Revolving flat x x x x o 7
1. Twin-top cassette o o o o o 2
Doffer*** x o 11
Pre-carding area fixed flats o o 3
Post-carding area fixed flats o 8
Licker-in 1 o* o** 14
Licker-in 2 o 13
Carding segments o 12
Licker-in 3 o 1
Flats stripping roll o 4
Flat strips roll o 5
Stripper cleaning roll o 9
Stripping roll o 10
ICFD feed roll o 15
DFK feed roll o 16
o* = Clothing licker-in
o** = Needle licker-in
*** = grind only clothings without an "enhanced point" (see page 264)
266 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
16
15
14
13 12 11 10
Number of
Number of passages
activations
1 5 … 10
2 10 … 15
3 25 … 35
4 35 … 50
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 267

Maintenance
Clothing service intervals for 100 % carded cotton or a tuft mixture of cotton and synthetic fibres
(standard clothings)
Note
clothing.
ings only.

No.
Cotton and blends 90 180 260 330 410 470 530 590 1800 2700
Revolving flat x x x o x x x o 7
1. Twin-top cassette o o o o o o o o 2
Cylinder x x x o 6
Doffer*** x x x o 11
Pre-carding area fixed flats o o o o 3
Post-carding area fixed flats o o 8
Licker-in 1 o* o* o** 14
Licker-in 2 o 13
Licker-in 3 o 1
Stripping roll o 10
ICFD feed roll o 15
DFK feed roll o 16
o** = needle licker-in (100 % cotton)
268 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
16
15
14
13 12 11 10
Number of
Number of passages
activations
1 5 … 15
2 15 … 50
3 50 … 100
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 269

Maintenance
Clothing service intervals for 100 % polyacrylic or 100 % viscose, shiny (standard clothings)
Note
clothing.
ings only.

No.
Polyacrylic or viscose 100 190 280 360 460 520 590 650 2000 3000
Cylinder x x x o 6
Licker-in 2 o 13
Licker-in 3 o 1
Stripping roll o 10
ICFD feed roll o 15
DFK feed roll o 16
270 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
16
15
14
13 12 11 10
Number of
Number of passages
activations
1 5 … 15
2 15 … 50
3 50 … 100
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 271

Maintenance
Clothing service intervals for 100 % polyester (standard clothings)
Note
clothing.
ings only.

No.
Polyester 80 150 210 270 340 390 440 490 2300 3000
Cylinder x x x o 6
Licker-in 2 o 13
Licker-in 3 o 1
Stripping roll o 10
ICFD feed roll o 15
DFK feed roll o 16
272 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
16
15
14
13 12 11 10
Number of
Number of passages
activations
1 5 … 15
2 15 … 50
3 50 … 100
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 273

Maintenance
Service intervals for long-life clothings
Clothing service intervals for 100 % combed cotton (long-life clothings)
Note
clothing.
The intervals are valid for long-life cloth-
ings only.
Long-life clothings Material processed in tonnes

No.
Cotton 90 180 270 360 450 900 1800 3200
Cylinder x x x x o 6
Revolving flat x x x x o 7
1. Twin-top cassette o o o o o 2
Doffer*** x o 11
Pre-carding area fixed flats o o 3
Post-carding area fixed flats o 8
Licker-in 1 o* o** 14
Licker-in 2 o 13
Licker-in 3 o 1
Stripping roll o 10
ICFD feed roll o 15
DFK feed roll o 16
274 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
16
15
14
13 12 11 10
Number of
Number of passages
activations
1 5 … 10
2 10 … 15
3 25 … 35
4 35 … 50
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 275

Maintenance
Clothing service intervals for 100 % carded cotton or a tuft mixture of cotton and synthetic fibres
(long-life clothings)
Note
clothing.
ings only.

No.
Cotton and blends 140 270 390 500 630 720 810 900 1800 2700
Cylinder x x x o 6
Licker-in 2 o 13
Licker-in 3 o 1
Stripping roll o 10
ICFD feed roll o 15
DFK feed roll o 16
276 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
16
15
14
13 12 11 10
Number of
Number of passages
activations
1 5 … 15
2 15 … 50
3 50 … 100
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 277

Maintenance
Clothing service intervals for 100 % polyacrylic or 100 % viscose, shiny (long-life clothings)
Note
clothing.
ings only.

No.
Polyacrylic or viscose 160 300 440 560 700 800 900 1000 2000 3000
Cylinder x x x o 6
Licker-in 2 o 13
Licker-in 3 o 1
Stripping roll o 10
ICFD feed roll o 15
DFK feed roll o 16
278 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
16
15
14
13 12 11 10
Number of
Number of passages
activations
1 5 … 15
2 15 … 50
3 50 … 100
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 279

Maintenance
Clothing service intervals for 100 % polyester (long-life clothings)
Note
clothing.
ings only.

No.
Polyester 120 230 330 420 530 600 680 750 2300 3000
Cylinder x x x o 6
Licker-in 2 o 13
Licker-in 3 o 1
Stripping roll o 10
ICFD feed roll o 15
DFK feed roll o 16
280 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
16
15
14
13 12 11 10
Number of
Number of passages
activations
1 5 … 15
2 15 … 50
3 50 … 100
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 281

Maintenance
Activating clothings
Before you activate a clothing, assess the condition Activating the main cylinder clothing
of the tips with a magnifying glass. This is the only To activate the main cylinder clothing, use the
way in which you can what percentage of the tips Trützschler TC-GD grinding device. Depending on
has been achieved by the grinding stone after acti- the condition of the clothing you can activate the
vation. The result of this test also affects the num- main cylinder clothing up to four times. The number
ber of planned passages. When grinding cylinder of passages also depends on the number of activa-
clothings and doffer clothings, one passage is the tions which have already been performed:
movement of the transversing grindstone from one
edge of the clothing to the other, and back again.
Number of Number of passages
DANGER activations combed other
Possible serious injury from rotating main
cylinder clothing! 1 5 … 10 5 … 15
Make sure that the card is switched off
2 10 … 15 15 … 50
and the cylinder is at a standstill before
you remove carding elements and the 3 25 … 35 50 … 100
cover sections. Secure the card to pre-
vent it from being switched back on. 4 35 … 50 –
DANGER Caution
Possible serious injury from rotating Risk of malfunctions and destruction of
grinding roll! clothings!
Wear close-fitting clothing and keep it Clothings must only be fitted, activated or
buttoned and tucked in at all times. ground by qualified specialists.
Staff with long hair must wear a hair net. Only those grinding devices which have
Always wear protective goggles when been provided especially for individual
carrying out grinding work. clothings must be used for grinding and
activating.
Make sure that nobody is next to the card
during the grinding process. Caution
Pay attention to the following instructions before Possible damage to the clothing and
activating or grinding clothings. grinding device!
Make sure that the following work has
Caution been performed before you attach the
Risk of malfunctions and destruction of grinding device:
clothings! – Run the material transport until all the material
Only the following clothings may be has been conveyed out of the card.
activated or ground on the card:
– Clean any build-up of fibres and soiling from
– Main cylinder clothing the fitting area of the main cylinder.
– Revolving flat clothing – Remove only the fixed flat and cover sections
– Doffer clothing which need to be removed for the grinding
process.
All other clothings must be replaced by
new ones.
282 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
Fitting the TC-GD grinding device
DANGER
Possible serious injury from rotating main
cylinder clothing!
and the cylinder is at a standstill before
you remove carding elements and the
cover sections. Secure the card to pre-
vent it from being switched back on.
Note
Also read and follow the separate operat-
ing instructions for the grinding device. 1
The figure opposite shows the position of the right-
hand grinding device holder on the main cylinder to
help with orientation.

1. Remove the third, fourth and fifth fixed
flats (1) or cover sections (2) from the pre-
carding area.
2
2. Shift the rubber seal (3) to the side and fix it in

place.
3. Unscrew the screw (5) and remove the insert
plate (4).
3
5
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 283

Maintenance
4. Screw the holders (1) for the grinding device

on the left and right to the side plates on the
main cylinder.
1
Note
The respective drilled holes on the hold-
ers for fitting the grinding device to the
side plate on the main cylinder are
marked "Left" and "Right" and "1 = Cylin-
der".
5. Fasten both positioning slides to the holders 2
using the knurled screws (2).
6. Pull back the grinding coupling (6) so that the

grinding stone does not touch the clothing.
7. Working as a pair, place the grinding device
on the holders with the grinding head facing
3
the clothing. Position the grinding device so
that the grinding stone can travel and even
distance beyond both edges. 6
Note 4
The grinding stone must not travel more
than 1/3 of its width beyond the clothing.
This prevents the stone from tilting.
5
8. Screw the grinding stone in place on the
positioning slides from below using wing
screws (5).
9. Use the knurled screws (3) and dial to set the
withdrawn grinding stone to 4 mm parallel to
the main cylinder clothing.
10. Shift the inductive proximity switch (9) and the

spacer bar to set the path of the grinding 7
stone so that the grinding stone can travel
evenly over the edges of the clothing.
11. Cover the exposed clothing area with the yel-
low protective cover (7).
12. Connect the power cables and data cables of
the control device to the connection sockets
(8) on the grinding device. 8
284 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
13. Connect the control device to the mains.

14. Set the rotary switch (1) to "Cylinder". 1
15. Switch on the control device using the
switch (2).
Caution
Make sure that the gap between the
grinding stone and the clothing is 4 mm
across the entire width.
Make sure that all tools have been 3
removed and tidied away. 2
16. Switch on the card and activate service mode.
DANGER
Risk of crushing for fingers and hands!
Limbs may become entangled in the
rotating cylinder.
Make sure that nobody is to the left or
right of the card during the grinding pro-
cess.
Note
The maximum speed of the cylinder is
575 rpm. If the speed exceeds this limit,
a fault message is shown and the cylin-
der is switched off.
Frequency Revolutions Ø pulley

[Hz] [rpm] [mm]
50 135 … 210
350 … 560
60 110 … 175
Note
Cards with adjustable cylinder speeds
are run at 520 rpm for the duration of the
grinding process.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 285

Maintenance
17. Select Grinding in service

mode.
Service mode
18. Select Main cylinder for- Grinding Main cylinder forwards with TC-GD
wards with TC-GD. Main cylinder forwards with TC-GD
19. Start the main cylinder. Main cylinder reversing
Grind doffer with TC-GD
Grind doffer with main cylinder
20. Check the PFS-M flats gap and confirm the

warning.
The main cylinder builds up to operating speed.
21. Switch on the grinding device by pressing the
START key (3) and wait until the grinding
stone has arrived on the left-hand side of the
machine.
22. Move the grinding stone into the grinding posi-
tion using the grinding coupling - sparks fly.
23. Allow the desired number of passages to be
carried out.
24. Disengage the grinding stone in the final posi-
tion and switch off the control device at the
switch (2).
25. Stop the main cylinder.
26. Switch the card off and secure it against

switching back on.
27. Check the grinding result on the main cylinder
clothing with a magnifying glass and allow the
grinding machine to make more passages
using the same setting as necessary.
28. Then remove the grinding device and mea-
sure the gap between the strips with clothing
and the main cylinder clothing.
29. If necessary, re-adjust the twin-top cassettes
(see the section starting on page 301).
30. Fit all fixed flats and cover sections which
have been removed on the main cylinder
again.
31. Check the settings of the fixed flats and cover
sections and adjust as necessary.
32. Check the revolving flats.
286 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
Activating the doffer clothing

To activate the main doffer clothing, use the
Trützschler TC-GD grinding device. When activat-
ing the doffer clothing only carry out one or two pas-
sages per activation process.
DANGER
Risk of crushing for fingers and hands!
Limbs may become entangled in the
rotating doffer roll.
and the doffer is at a standstill before you
remove service flap (1). Secure the card
to prevent it from being switched back on.
Caution
Possible damage to the clothing and
grinding device!
Make sure that the following work has 1
been performed before you attach the
grinding device:
– Run the material transport until all the material
has been conveyed out of the card.
– Clean any build-up of fibres and soiling from
the fitting area of the doffer.
1. Screw the holders (2) for the grinding device

on the left and right to the side plates on the
doffer.
Note
The respective drilled holes on the hold-
ers for fitting the grinding device to the
side plate on the doffer are marked "Left"
and "Right" and "2 = doffer".
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 287

Maintenance
2. Fasten both positioning slides (1) to the hold-

ers using the knurled screws (2). 1
3. Pull back the grinding coupling so that the

3 4 5
grinding stone does not touch the clothing.
4. Working as pair, position the grinding device
(5) on the holder with the grinding head facing
the clothing and screw in place on the posi-
tioning slides with wing screws (4).
5. Use the knurled screws (3) and dial to set the
withdrawn grinding stone to 4 mm parallel to
the doffer clothing.
6. Shift the inductive proximity switch (6) and the

spacer bar (7) to set the path of the grinding
stone so that the grinding stone can travel 7
6
evenly over the edges of the clothing.
Note
The grinding stone must not travel more
than 1/3 of its width beyond the clothing.
This prevents the stone from tilting.
7. Connect the power cables and data cables of
the control device to the connection sockets
(8) on the grinding device.
8
8. Connect the control device to the mains.
288 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
9. Set the rotary switch (1) on the control device

to "Doffer".
1
10. Switch on the control device using the
switch (2).
Caution
Make sure that the gap between the
grinding stone and the clothing is 4 mm
across the entire width.
Make sure that all tools have been 3
removed and tidied away.
2
DANGER
Fingers may become entangled in the
rotating doffer roll.
cess.
11. Switch on the card and activate service mode.
12. Select Grinding in service Service mode

mode. Grinding Grind doffer with TC-GD
Main cylinder forwards with TC-GD

13. Select Grind doffer with
TC-GD. Main cylinder reversing
14. Start the doffer. Grind doffer with TC-GD
Grind doffer with main cylinder
The doffer builds up to the setpoint speed.

15. Switch on the grinding device by pressing
the START key (3) and wait until the grinding
stone has arrived on the right-hand side of
the machine.
Power BAE 4
16. Move the grinding stone into the grinding posi-

tion using the grinding coupling – sparks fly.
17. Allow one or two passages to be carried out.
18. Disengage the grinding stone in the final posi-
tion and switch off the grinding device.
19. Stop the doffer.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 289

Maintenance
20. Switch the card off and secure it against

switching back on.
21. Check the grinding result on the doffer cloth-
ing with a magnifying glass and allow the
grinding machine to make more passages
using the same setting as required.
22. Close the service flap.
Notes
After re-clothing the doffer with the stan-
dard clothing, you have to activate the
clothing.
Increase the number of passages for
standard clothings until approximately
70% of the tips are activated. This is
equivalent to approximately 20 pas-
sages.
290 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
Activating the revolving flat clothing

To activate the revolving slat clothing, use the
Trützschler TC-FG grinding device.
1 2 3
The diagram opposite shows the typical appear-
ance of wire tips:
1 Wire tip of a new clothing
2 Worn wire tip
3 Re-ground wire tip
You fit the grinding device as follows:
1. Open the card housing upwards so that the

front flats area is accessible.
Caution
Possible damage to the flats! 4
Fit the roll holder (4) on the correct side of
the machine in accordance with the print
("left" and "right").
Make sure that the pins of the flats sit in
the guide grooves of the plastic profiles.
2. Place the roll holder on the flats frame as
shown in the figure and lift the flats (6) slightly
from underneath as you do so.
5
3. Fasten the roll holders in place on both sides
of the machine with two screws (5).
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 291

Maintenance
Note
Turn the roll to the highest position so that 1
it does not rest on the flats clothing when
fitting.
4. Turn the adjusting screw (1) on both shaft
ends of the roll so that the roll is in the highest
position.
5. Working as a pair, lift the grinding roll by both

shaft ends and lower it into the roll holders (2).
6. Clamp the grinding roll to the lug (4) on both

sides with the clamping element (3) – set the 3
clamping element with the nuts (5) as neces-
sary.
292 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
7. Fasten the traversing gear (2) in place on the

right-hand shaft end with the threaded pin (1). 1 2
8. Position the axial adjuster (3) in the centre by

turning the grinding roll by hand.
Caution
Risk of destroying the clothing! 4 5
Before grinding, check the sense of rota-
tion of the motor. If the sense of rotation
is incorrect, the clothing will be raised and
destroyed. The roll must rotate down-
wards in the direction of the movement of
the flats (see arrow).
9. Push the gear motor (5) onto the left-hand
shaft end. Insert the positioning pin (7) into
the drilled hole (6) on the flat steel as you do 7 6
so.
10. Push on the gear motor as far as it will go and
fasten it in place with two threaded pins (4).
11. Activate the service mode using the key

switch.
Service mode
Grinding Flats service
12. Select Flats service.
Flats service
Flats speed
Move flats for TC-FCT
Sharpen flats with TC-FG
Sharpen flats with main cylinder
Grinding amount
Power BAE 4
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 293

Maintenance
Caution
Risk of destroying the graphite pins!
Make sure that the graphite pins (1) have
been removed on both sides of the 1
machine.
13. If necessary, remove the graphite pins on both
14. Confirm the warning on the touch screen.
15. Check the PFS-M flats gap and confirm the
warning.
16. Deactivate the flats cleaning unit; to do so,

turn the stop lever (2) downwards as far as it
will go.
17. Check the stop function on the hand held

remote control (3). 3
294 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
The grinding device has been fitted properly.

18. Mark one flat as the reference flat and remove 1 2
the neighbouring flats to the left and right.
19. Move the reference flat to one of the two mea-
suring points "3" (2) or "4" (1).
20. Use the flats gauge to measure the gap
between the reference flat and the cylinder
clothing.
21. Move the revolving flat further using the hand
held remote control and replace the flat pins
which have been removed.
22. Move one flat into the central position under-

neath the roll using the hand held remote con- 3 4
trol.
23. Set the gap between the clothing and the
grinding roll to a dimension of 7/1000" on both
the left and right.
24. Unfasten the locking mechanism (3) on both
sides of adjusting screw and set the adjusting
screw (4) to "0".
25. Fasten the locking mechanism again.
DANGER
Fingers may become entangled in the
rotating roll.
cess.
26. Switch on the grinding roll drive.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 295

Maintenance
Caution
Risk of destroying the flat pins!
Service mode
Select menu item Grind flats with
Flats service
TC-FG in the Grinding menu before you
start the revolving flat. Flats service
Flats speed
27. Select Flats service. Move flats for TC-FCT
28. Select Sharpen flats with Sharpen flats with main cylinder
TC-FG.
Grinding amount
29. Start the revolving flat.
The revolving flat and the grinding device are in Power BAE 4
operation. The revolving flat runs at the perma-

nently set speed of 300 mm/min.
30. Working as a pair, gradually and slowly turn

down the left and right setting dial (1) on the 1
grinding device until a small amount of sparks 3
fly. 2
1
31. Equalise the revolving flats with a full turn of

the grinding roll so that all tips are at the same
height.
32. Then turn down a further 0.3 mm on the grind-
ing device for flats with a high number of tips
and a further 0.4 mm for flats with a low num-
ber of tips.
Note
A long graduation mark on the setting
dial is equivalent to 0.1 mm, i. e. the
number 3 on the setting dial is equivalent
to 0.3 mm.
33. Mark the first finished ground flat pin with a
pen.
34. Once the revolving flat has passed through
fully, reset the setting dial to zero and switch
off the grinding roll drive and the revolving
flats drive.
Note
Replace the emery belt on the grinding
roll with a new one approximately every
25 grindings. Only use the original
Trützschler emery belt.
296 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
35. Then check the clothing tips with the magnify-

ing glass.
1 2
If the grinding results are no satisfactory, carry out
a second run-through without equalisation, starting
with point 23.
36. Check the clothing tips again with the magni-
fying glass and, if necessary, repeat the steps
starting from point 23.
37. Then remove the marked flat, move it to the
same measuring point "3" (2) or "4" (1) and
measure the distance between the flat pin and
the cylinder clothing.
The difference between the measured value before
grinding and the measured value after grinding is
the amount of grinding.
38. Place the revolving flat with the PFS-M flats

adjustment system lower towards the main
3
cylinder clothing by the same amount as the
amount of grinding as follows.
With manual PFS-M flats adjustment:

39. Reduce the current dimension of the flats gap
using the lever (3) and the dial (4) by the
same amount as the amount of grinding.
With motorised PFS-M flats adjustment:

40. Select Grinding amount and
enter the amount of grinding in
1/1000". Service mode
Flats service
41. Accept.
Flats service
Flats speed
The set amount of grinding is displayed on the Move flats for TC-FCT
bottom on the right, next to the button Grinding
amount.
Sharpen flats with main cylinder
When the main cylinder has been switched on the
motorised PFS-M flats adjustment system lowers Grinding amount
the revolving flat automatically to the flats gap ini-

tially set.
Power BAE 4
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 297

Maintenance
Removing the twin top cassette

Note
Always carry out the work described in
the following in pairs in order to avoid tilt-
ing the fixed flats.
Switch off the master switch and lock it with a 1
padlock to prevent it from being switched back
on.
2. Mark the cassettes in accordance with the
numbers on the main cylinder with a pen 4
before removal.
3. Remove the screw (2) on the right-hand side 2
of the machine, whilst leaving the adjusting
screw (1) untouched.
4. Remove the screw (3) on the left-hand side of

the machine, whilst leaving the adjusting
screws (4) untouched.
5. Working as a pair, remove the fixed flats
evenly. Do not tilt the fixed flats. 3
298 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
Replacing the strips with clothing of the twin top cassettes

1. Set down the removed twin top cassette care-
fully so that the sections do not become dam-
aged.
2. Undo the hexagon socket nuts (1).
3. Unscrew and remove the nuts (2), making

sure not to readjust the adjusting screw (3). 2
4. Remove the side part (4) of the twin top cas-

sette.
4
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 299

Maintenance
5. Pull out the strips with clothing (1).

6. Insert a new strip. 1
7. Tighten the hexagon socket nuts (3) with the

dynamometric key.
The appropriate torque is noted on the
label (2) (3 Nm).
8. Put on the side part (5) of the twin top

cassette and screw it tight with the nuts (4).
4 5
300 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
Re-installing the twin top cassette

Caution
Risk of warping the twin top cassettes!
When fitting the twin top cassettes,
always tighten the side with the two
adjusting screws first. Otherwise the
section may warp axially.
1
1. Working as a pair, place the twin top cassette
on the main cylinder and screw in place with
the screws (1 and 2) on the left and right-hand
2. Check the specified dimension between the
clothing strip and the main cylinder clothing
with the respective gauge (see recommended
settings on page 116).
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 301

Maintenance
3. If necessary, adjust the dimension between

the twin-top clothing and the main cylinder 1
clothing using the spring-loaded adjusting
screws (1 and 2) in line with Trützschler's
setting recommendations.
4
4. If necessary, adjust the tangential position of

the strip with clothing to the main cylinder
clothing using the adjusting screws (3) and
secure by tightening the lock nuts. 2
3
302 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
Replacing MAGNOTOP clothing strips

The optional MAGNOTOP clothing strips are held
on the flats pins by magnetic force. You can replace
the old clothing strips with new ones directly on the
card.
1. Run the card to empty.
2. Remove the first flat and place it on the flat 1
holder with the clothing facing upwards. 2
Note
Blow the old clothing strip with com-
pressed air before removal so that no
residual material or metal particles get
onto the magnetic surface (3).
3. Raise and remove the old clothing strip (1)
using the special tool (2).
Caution
Possible damage to the flats! Do not use
sharp-edged tools to clean the soft mag- 3
netic surface.
4. Clean the magnetic surface (3) of the flats
with compressed air; remove any metal parti-
cles stuck to the surface with a strip of adhe-
sive tape.
Caution
Possible damage to the clothings!
Increase the carding gap between the
flats clothing and the cylinder clothing
before you insert flats with new clothing
strips (see page 70).
Note
Before inserting the new clothing strip,
make sure the working direction is cor-
rect.
5. Place a new clothing strip on the magnetic
surface and clip the flat back into the flats
transport belt.
6. Replace all the other clothing strips as
described.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 303

Maintenance
Replacing the flats transport belt

The flats transport belt is an expendable part and
should be replaced every two years.
When changing the flats transport belt you must
rotate the flats system. This can be performed
either manually or using the motor.
Rotating the flats system manually

1. Switch off the card and secure it to prevent it
from being switched on.
2. Turn the stop lever (1) clockwise to separate

(disengage) the cleaning roll and flats cloth-
1
ing.
3. Remove the graphite pins.
DANGER
Risk of crushing from rotating flats!
If the flats are arranged asymmetrically,
the flat may can rotate once the shearing
pin is removed.
Fix the flat in place before removing the
shearing pin.
4. Remove the shearing pin (3) from the rear 3
2
flats drive shaft on the right-hand side.
5. Turn the flats system to the desired position
by the hexagon (2) on the rear flats drive
shaft.
304 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
Rotating the flats transport system using the motor
1. Activate service mode.

2. Select the Flats service menu.
3. Turn the stop lever (1) clockwise to separate

(disengage) the cleaning roll and flats cloth-
ing. 1
4. Remove the graphite pins.
5. Connect the hand held remote control if you

have not already done so. 2
6. Enter the desired flats speed on the operating
panel. 3
7. Move the flats into the desired position using
the operating keys on the had held remote 4
control: 0
– To move the flat forwards, press key (2).
– To move the flat backwards, press key (3).
– To move the flat backwards, press key (4).
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 305

Maintenance
Replacing the flats transport belt
1. Switch off the card and secure it to prevent it

from being switched on.
2. Remove the flats.
3. Unscrew the threaded pin (5) on the toothed

belt wheel (3). 1 2 3
4. Push the toothed belt wheel inwards.

5. Unfasten the clamping ring (1) and the
screws (2) on the flange bearing (6). 4
6. Pull the flange bearing from the drive
shaft (4).
6 5
Caution
Possible serious damage to the card!
7 8
Insert the flats transport belt in the same
direction and align the belts parallel to
each other.
7. Place the flats transport belt (7) over the drive
shaft (8) from the inside.
The arrows showing the direction (9) on both
flats transport belts must point the same way.
306 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
8. Align both flats transport belts parallel to each

other.
Note
To do so, align the bottom edge of two of
the company names (2) printed on flats
transport belt with the front guide rails (1).
9. Attach the flats as described in the following
section.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 307

Maintenance
Attaching the flats

1. Check the horizontal position of the rear drive
shaft and the deflection device (4) with a spirit 1 2 3 4
level.
2. Readjust the position as necessary.
3. Place flat (2) before the entry of flats (1) on
the guide rails (3).
4. Turn the revolving flat in the working direction.
Attach a further flat in every second position
as you do so.
5. Once the first flat (6) enters at the front deflec-

tion device (5), check the horizontal position 5
of the flat.
6. Set the spacing between flats clothing and
main cylinder clothing (see page 101).
7. Set the graphite pins (see page 309).
8. Set the flats run monitoring.
9. Attach the remaining flats.
6
10. Set the belt tension of the flats transport belt
(see page 219).
308 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
Setting the graphite pins

1. First set the dimension on both graphite pins
at the front (1) as specified in the figure.
2. Set the specified dimension on both graphite
pins at the rear (2).
+0,5 +0,5
7 mm 7 mm
1 2
Setting the flats run monitoring

1. Set the gap between the sensor on the flats
run monitoring and the flats pins.
Note
You can make the settings more easily if
only every second flat is attached.
2. Fasten the sensor to the pins of the flat with
both hexagon socket screws (3). +0,5
1 mm
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 309

Maintenance
Card lubrication schedule

Only the following bearings on the card must be Notes
regularly lubricated. All other bearings have a life- Information on the type of lubricant and
long lubrication, i.e. for an operating period of five the required quantity can often be found
years (approximately 40,000 operating hours). on the type plates of the respective gear
unit.
You will find the product names of various
manufacturers in the Table of lubricants
on page 312.
The tables are arranged by intervals.
Left-hand machine side
1 2
4 3
Frequency in hours
Item Task
4.000 8.000 40.000
2 2 delivery rolls Lubricate the bearings with 1.2 g of grease each x

(KE2/3R-30).
3 Doffer Lubricate the bearings with 120 g of grease each x

(K2K-20).
4 Cylinder Lubricate the bearings with 180 g of grease each x

(K2K-20).
1 Gear motor Oil change with 1.8 litre (CLP/PG 220) x

DFK feed roll
310 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Maintenance
Right-hand machine side
4 3 2
Frequency in hours
Item Task
8.000 40.000
3 Cylinder Lubricate the bearings approximately 180 g of grease x

(K2K-20).
4 Doffer Lubricate the bearings approximately 120 g of grease x

(K2K-20).
1 Flats drive gears Oil change with 1.5 litres (CLP PG 1000) x
2 Feed roll drive Oil change with 0.5 litre (CLP/PG 220) x
gear unit
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 311

Maintenance
Table of lubricants
Caution
Machine elements may be subject to Lubricants with the following specifications are
premature wear! required to lubricate the machine in the proper
Do not mix mineral lubricants with syn- manner. The table contains various manufacturer
thetic lubricants under any circum- and product names to provide you with alternatives
stances! Only use lubricants which are when purchasing.
specified in this table.
Greases and oils

DIN
specification CLP VG 220 CLP PG 1000
KE2/3R-30 K2K-20
(mineral) (synthetic)
Supplier
ARAL Aralub HL 2 Degol BG 220 Degol GS 1000
BP Energrease LS 2 Energol GR-XP 220
CALTEX Meropa 220 Synlube WS 1000
CASTROL Optimol Firetemp Olista Longtime 2 Alpha SP 220 Tribol 800/1000
XT 2
Longtime PD 2 Tribol 1100/220 Tribol 1300/1000
Spheerol MP 2 Optigear BM 220 Optiflex A 1000
ESSO Unirex N 2 Spartan EP 220
FUCHS Renolit GP 2 Renolin CLP 220 Renolin PG 1000
Renolin CLP 220 Plus
KLÜBER Asonic HQ 72-102 Centoplex 2 Klüberoil GEM 1-220 N Klübersynth GH 6-
1000
Klüberquiet BQH
72-102
KYODO YUSHI Multemp SB-M
MOBIL Mobilgear 600 XP 220 Glygoyle 1000
SHELL Alvania RL2 Omala 220 Tivela S 1000
Omala F 220
Omala HD 220
TEXACO Multifak MP 2 Meropa 220 Synlube WS 1000
TOTAL Multis 2 Carter EP 220
Trützschler SM 100/2 Alvania RL2
Trützschler 400 g 200 kg:
part number: cartridge: 0 350 83,302,000
0 350 83 302 016
50 kg:
25 kg: 0 350 83 302 003
0 350 83,302,015
312 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Appendix
Appendix
In this chapter you will find further information such as technical data, equipment, an index of specialist
terms and a list of abbreviations, a table of expendable parts as well as instructions for the transportation of
the card.
Technical specification
General data 3360
4180
2000
Dimensions (H x W x D) 3,360 x 2,000 x 4,180 [mm]

Working width of tuft feeder 1,200 mm (TC 07 and TC 07 S)
962.5 mm (TC 06)
Working width of the card 1,020 mm
Maximum continuous production 200 kg/h
Maximum delivery rate 500 m/min
Compressed air requirement 1,400 NI/h (minimum of 7.0 bar from compressed air network)
Net weight approximately 5,450 kg (tuft feeder and card)
Floor load approximately 9,675 N/m2
Maximum surface pressure per base plate approximately 38 N/cm2
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 313

Appendix
Production
Production output TC 06 TC 07 TC 07 S
Max. continuous production [kg/h] a) 80 200 150
Max. delivery speed [m/min] 240 500 400

a)
The actual production output depends on the optional equipment, material characteristics and other am-
bient conditions.
Feed
Material feed TC 06 TC 07 TC 07 S
Max. material rate [kg/h] 80 200 150
Max. blowing air rate [m3/h] 1,500
Operating pressure [Pa] min. 600 / max. 1,200
Dust extraction unit

Tuft feeder dust extraction TC 06 TC 07 TC 07 S
Max. exhaust air rate [m3/h] 1,670 2,000 2,000
Operating pressure [Pa] min. –20 / max. –50
Dust throughput [kg/h] 0.25 0.3
Card dust extraction TC 06 TC 07 TC 07 S
Max. exhaust air rate [m3/h] 4,100 + 5 %
Operating pressure [Pa] –20
Max. dust throughput [kg/h] 0.2
Waste suction
Waste suction, continuous TC 06 TC 07 TC 07 S
surface mounted:
Max. waste quantity [kg/h] 10
Max. suction air rate [m3/h] 3,700 + 5 %
flush mounted:
Max. suction air rate [m3/h]

3,900 + 5 %
(including can changer)
314 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Appendix
Waste suction, intermittent TC 06 TC 07 TC 07 S
Max. waste quantity [kg/h]

10
at 1kg per suction cycle a)
Max. suction air rate [m3/h] 3,600 + 5 %

a)
A suction cycle lasts at least 5 seconds and is repeated at least every 6 minutes.
Optional flats waste suction TC 06 TC 07 TC 07 S
Suction air rate [m3/h] 350 + 10 %
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 315

Appendix
Continuous power consumption

The maximum continuous power consumption
16
depends on the speed of the cylinder and the pro-
P [kW] 15
duction rate. For the actual power consumption 14
refer to the diagram opposite. It shows the maxi- 13
12
mum continuous power consumption (P [kW])
11 rpm
600
above the production output ([kg/h]) for three differ- 10
rpm
ent cylinder speeds. 9 500
8 rpm
7 400
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
[kg/h]
ISO 4871 noise emission values
Operating status without material, max. cylinder speed 600 rpm, integrated fan,
n = 2860 rpm, central suction
Effective perceived emission Danger for the emission

sound pressure level sound pressure level
LpA [dB(A)] KpA [dB(A)]
Delivery speed [m/min] 100: 67 4

250: 73 4
400: 75 4
The values have been determined in line with noise test standard DIN EN ISO 9902 with reference to basic
standard DIN EN ISO 11204 The sum of the measured noise emission value and the corresponding dan-
ger represents the upper limit which may occur during measurements
316 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Appendix
Standard equipment Options and additional equipment

– Digitally controlled servo motors for feed roll, Depending on the area of use, material and
doffer, delivery unit and coiler required quality, the following options and addi-
tional equipment are available:
– T-CON carding gap optimisation
– Speed regulation for main cylinder and
– TC-CB electronic main cylinder brake
WEBFEED TC-VSD
– Infinitely variable flats speed
– MAGNOTOP TC-MT aluminium flats
– Metal detector for feeding
– Integrated TC-CI compressor
– WEBSPEED sliver former
– TC-II interior lighting
– CLASSIC TOP aluminium flats
– Sockets in the TC-P frame
– Safety central locking
– Interface for KIT TC-IF
– T-CON carding gap optimisation TC-TC
– TC-TS transverse web delivery belt (for pro-
– Spectrogram calculation and spectrogram ductions < 150 kg/h or card delivery speeds
analysis, thick spots detection, short-term < 300 m/min only)
CV values, maintenenance management
– NEPCONTROL TC-NCT nep sensor
– Data exchange between machines using (except TC 07 S)
CF card
– TC-FCT FLATCONTROL flats measuring
– TKN network interface to installation control system
unit
– Mount for the TC-SF flats grinding system
– Tuft feeder control
If you have questions on the individual options,
– CCD long-term control please contact the Trützschler after-sales depart-
ment.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 317

Appendix
Specialist terms Abbreviations

Availability A% Sliver deviation
Possible production time / shift length (fault-free
CC Can Changer, can changer
time) x 100 %
CV value Variation of sliver count
Can filling
Length of produced sliver after which an automatic CV% CV value at the output
can change is carried out.
DFK Tuft feeder
CV value
D% Draft deviation
variation coefficient of mass distribution of a sliver
in running direction dtex Unit of measure for fibre count (decitex)
Delivery E Efficiency
Speed with which the material leaves the machine
g Gram(s)
(delivery speed)
gr Grain, 1 gr = 64.799 mg
Draft
Ratio of the peripheral speed of the feed roll to the gr/yd Grains/yard
delivery roll in the deposited sliver system
ICFD Fineness regulation for the web
Draft deviation D%
KIT Karden Informationssystem Trützschler
Ratio of actual draft to target draft
(Trützschler card information system)
Efficiency
ktex Kilotex (g/m)
Production time / shift time of the machine x 100%
l Wave length in the spectrogram
Flex unit
flexible arrangement of cards for two feed lines lb Pound, 1 lb = 453.59 g
Limit value mi Mile(s)
Limit values are cut-off values. The red indicator
MTT Multi-twin-top fixed flat
lamp lights up. A fault message appears on the
operating panel. NCT Nep sensor
Lot data Ne Number in English/imperial (yd/lb)
Setpoints for the active lot
Nm Number in metric (m/g)
Sliver deviation A%:
PFS-M Flats adjusting system
Deviation of the actual sliver weight from the set-
point sliver weight as a percentage PMS-M Blade adjustment system
Sliver fineness TKN Trützschler Kommunikations Netzwerk
or sliver count, in Nm (m/g) or Ne (Trützschler communication network)
Sliver weight TST Trützschler Service Tool
in ktex (g/m) or gr/yd
yd Yard(s), 1 yd = 0.9144 m
Spectrogram
Displays periodic faults as vertical columns
Thick spot
Short, sharp increase in mass of the sliver pro-
duced
318 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Appendix
Expendable parts
The intervals for replacement are based on stan- Note
dard materials and proper use of the machine. You will find further expendable parts in
Depending on the material used and the ambient the catalogue of replacement parts.
conditions, the actual wear and tear may differ.
Key:
The table is arranged according to frequency of
(x)1) Expendable part for TC 07 S
replacement and in ascending alphabetical order.
(x)2) for machines with the WEBFEED Plus option
(x)3) for machines with the web suction option
Frequency of
Designation Part No. Quantity TC 06 TC 07
replacement
High-temperature grease SM 100/2 035083302016 2.4 g 6 months x x

Alvania grease 035083302003 580 cm3 1 year x x
TC-CI filter element 037181761577 1x 1 year x x
TC-CI slide valve 037181761583 5x 1 year x x
Toothed belt HTD 720-D8M-20 035081755833 1x 1 year x x
Blade, 1st licker-in 991322130031 1x 2 years x x
Blade, flats cleaning device 980022630062 1x 2 years x x
Blade, suction hood, top 990522410033 see 2 years x x
page 121
Cup brush 976000648003 2x 2 years x x

Flat belt W = 20 mm, L = 1088 mm 035081755353 1x 2 years x x
Flat belt W = 25 mm, L = 1,690 mm 035081755250 1x 2 years x x
Flat belt W = 50 mm, L = 3,530 mm 035081755363 1x 2 years x x
Hard fabric scraper, bottom see 1x 2 years x x
catalogue of re-
placement parts
Hard fabric scraper, top (26 mm) 991300180045 1x 2 years x x

MTT blades 990522410010 see 2 years x x
page 121
Scraper blade 991322160084 1x 2 years x x
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 319

Appendix
Frequency of
replacement

Sealing ring 105/75 Ø 6+8 WN2233T.16 035081223258 2x 2 years x x
Sealing ring 150/120 980300200140 6x 2 years x x
Sealing strip PE felt, foam rubber 976000170003 2x 2 years x x
Synchroflex toothed belt, 84 cams 976000630002 2x 2 years x x
T-CON carbon contact, complete 991400145029 1x 2 years x x
Toothed belt HTD 1120-8M-20 035081755835 1x 2 years (x)3) (x)3)
Toothed belt HTD 1120-D8M-20 035081755847 1x 2 years x x
Toothed belt HTD 1328-8M-20 035081755836 1x 2 years x x
Toothed belt HTD 1360-8M-20 035081755852 1x 2 years (x)1)
Toothed belt HTD 350-5M-10 035081755855 1x 2 years (x)2)
Toothed belt HTD 800-D8M-20 035081755834 1x 2 years x x
Toothed belt HTD 860-D5M-10 035081755856 1x 2 years (x)2)
V-ledges with chamfered groove, left and right 980000630016 2x 2 years x x
Bearing unit, delivery INA 991300181001 2x 5 years x x
Beater roll with needles 990307180046 1x 5 years x
Clamping profile 30 x 30 [mm], self-adhesive 137182090041 7.2 m 5 years x x
320 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Appendix
Frequency of
replacement
Cover section, 2nd licker-in, front 991322130017 1x 5 years x x

Cover section, 2nd licker-in, rear 991322130018 2x 5 years x x
Cylinder, knife bar, bottom, complete 991300810006 1x 5 years x x
Cylinder, knife bar, top, complete 991300810004 1x 5 years x x
Cylinder, measuring funnel, complete 991300810002 1x 5 years x x
Cylinder, Webspeed, complete 991300810003 1x 5 years x x
Deep groove ball bearing 6006 2RS DIN625 035081730224 10 x 5 years x x
Deep groove ball bearing 6207, 2RS, DIN625 035081730167 2x 5 years x
Deep groove ball bearing 6308, VV, DIN625 035081730199 6x 5 years x x
Edge protection profile 21 x 9.3 [mm] 035081221353 9m 5 years x x
Edge protection sealing profile 035081221355 2m 5 years x x
Flange bearing RFE 35 035081732040 2x 5 years x x
Foam rubber cord Ø 8 WN 2213 T.1 035081221205 2.5 m 5 years x x
Foam rubber profile 7.0 x 7.5 (± 0.4) [mm] 980300200140 0.8 m 5 years x x
Gore-shaped section, 2nd licker-in, bottom 991322130044 1x 5 years x x
Graphite stone, ground 976000623005 2x 5 years x x
Hollow profile 12 x 10 [mm], foam rubber 035081221214 1.3 m 5 years x x
Hollow profile 12 x 10 [mm], foam rubber 035081221214 0.2 m 5 years x x
Hollow profile 12 x 10.4 x 1048 [mm] combination 035081221284 6x 5 years x x
profile
Hollow profile 12 x 10.4 x 916 [mm], combination 035081221285 4x 5 years x x

profile
Inspection window, left 991300130053 1x 5 years x x

Inspection window, right 991300130054 1x 5 years x x
Lamellar double ring FK6 ASD 035081717005 4x 5 years x x
Lamellar double ring FK6 ASD, Ø 41 mm 035081717002 6x 5 years x x
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 321

Appendix
Frequency of
replacement

MTT cover section, below front 991322430008 1x 5 years x x
MTT cover section, below rear 991322410009 1x 5 years x x
Opening roll, complete 991469115001 1x 5 years x
Seal N Z 760-00.861.000 035081221250 0.6 m 5 years x x
Seal, (15 mm) 991300630017 1x 5 years x x
Seal, 1st licker-in 991300590005 2x 5 years x x
Seal, comb box, bottom left 980300190014 1x 5 years x x
Seal, comb box, bottom right 980300190013 1x 5 years x x
Seal, comb box, top left 980300190009 1x 5 years x x
Seal, comb box, top right 980300190008 1x 5 years x x
Seal, duct, flats cleaning, left 991300590059 1x 5 years x x
Seal, extension bend 991300410007 4x 5 years x x
Seal, funnel and web doffer 991300590018 1x 5 years x x
Seal, licker-in bearing 991300130022 4x 5 years x x
Seal, main collector 991300590061 1x 5 years x x
Seal, main collector, flush mounted 991300590075 1x 5 years x x
Seal, round 991300160126 3x 5 years x x
Seal, round (15 mm) 990500630035 2x 5 years x x
Seal, suction duct, cover, front left 991300590054 1x 5 years x x
Seal, suction duct, MTT doffer side 991300590050 1x 5 years x x
322 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Appendix
Frequency of
replacement
Seal, suction duct, MTT licker-in side 991300590051 2x 5 years x x

Seal, suction duct, transfer unit 991300590036 1x 5 years x x
Seal, suction duct, transfer unit, web doffer, right 991300590067 1x 5 years x x
Seal, suction duct, Webfeed left 991300590048 1x 5 years x x
Seal, suction duct, Webfeed, left surface 991300590032 1x 5 years x x
mounted
Seal, UC duct / main collector 991300590019 1x 5 years x x

Sealing ring (PE-UHMW/KLS) 980300190129 2x 5 years x x
Sealing ring, collector for combs 991300120026 4x 5 years x x
Sealing strip 3 x 10 [mm], self-adhesive 035081232440 1m 5 years x x
Sealing strip 3 x 8 [mm], self-adhesive 035081232439 8m 5 years x x
Sealing strip 9 x 13 [mm], self-adhesive 035081260050 1.5 m 5 years x x
Self-aligning ball bearing 1207, DIN630 035081730407 2x 5 years x
Shaft sealing ring BASL 35 x 47 x 7 [mm] 035081712626 1x 5 years x x
Shaft sealing ring BASL 45 x 60 x 7 [mm] 035081712633 3x 5 years x x
Snap-lock coupling Ø 10 mm 035081630229 12 x 5 years x x
Snap-lock coupling Ø 8 mm 035081630228 4x 5 years x x
Spiral hose, nominal width 100 mm 035081250036 6.5 m 5 years x x
Tension roller, complete 991300180001 2x 5 years x x
Tension roller, Ø 92 mm, complete 991400340012 2x 5 years x x
Tension roller, smooth ( Ø 73 mm) 991300160014 1x 5 years x x
Textile foam 10 x 3 [mm] 035081232440 3m 5 years x x
Transition piece, front top left 990500430006 1x 5 years x x
Transition piece, front top right 990500430007 1x 5 years x x
Transition piece, left 990500440015 2x 5 years x x
Transition piece, MTT, left 990500410018 variable 5 years x x
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 323

Appendix
Frequency of
replacement
Transition piece, rear top left 990500410039 1x 5 years x x

Transition piece, rear top right 990500410040 1x 5 years x x
1. Licker-in roll (needle licker-in) 991322130084 1x as required x x
Differential pressure switch 100-1000 PA 942000207001 1x as required x x
Displacement sensor C12 037181882961 1x as required x x
Displacement sensor C6 136182205050 1x as required x x
Grinding belt for TC-FG 037207100002 1x as required x x
Inductive proximity switch 136082205048 2x as required x x
Inductive proximity switch M12 x 1 136082205046 4x as required x x
Inductive proximity switch M18 x 1 136082205047 3x as required x x
Safety locking device, 24 VDC, 50/60 Hz 136082204050 6x as required x x
Safety switch AZ 17 2 break contact 136082204061 1x as required x x
Tubular brush holder, complete with holder and 136082803530 1x as required x
carbon brushes
324 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Appendix
Storage
After unloading, the machine must be stored in a If you wish to move the card to another location at
dry environment. Do not remove the packaging a later date, you will require the transportation aids
material and foil until shortly before installation. which Trützschler include in the delivery. Store
Protect the machine from external damage. these transportation aids in a safe place once the
card has been commissioned so that they are
available should they be required.
Transport
If you wish to transport the delivered card to your DANGER
production location, use the transportation aids Risk of serious injury from falling loads!
included in the scope of delivery. Store these trans- Only ever use the transportation aids
portation aids in a safe place once the card has delivered with the machine and adhere to
been commissioned so that they are available the following guidelines on transporta-
should they be required. tion.
Make sure that no persons are situated in
Different transportation aids are included in the dangerous areas during transportation.
delivery depending on how the card is delivered.
If delivered without a container, the card can be The card is delivered as shown in the following fig-
moved by crane. If delivered with a container, it can ure. The card is screwed to a pallet in four places
be transported on rollers and a steering carriage. and secured against slipping by two pieces of
squared timber.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 325

Appendix
Delivery in a container
1. Unscrew the four nuts and both pieces of squared timber.
2. Screw on the four transport brackets in the corners of the card frame.
326 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Appendix
3. Lead the two rectangular tubes through the screw-fastened brackets and place the jack centrally
underneath the front tube.
4. Raise the card until the support blocks fit under the corners of the card in the low position. Using the
jack, carefully lower the card onto the front support blocks.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 327

Appendix
5. Position the jack centrally beneath the rear rectangular tube and raise until the support blocks fit under
the rear corners of the card in the high position. Using the jack, carefully lower the card onto the rear
support blocks.
360
6. Raise the front side of the card using the jack so that the support block fits under the corners in the
high position; carefully lower the card onto the front support blocks.
440
328 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Appendix
7. Working in a pair, pull the pallet out from underneath the card to the side.
361
431
8. Screw the rollers from below onto the rear end of the frame.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 329

Appendix
9. Using the jack, lower the card to the low position of the support blocks in two stages - first at the front,
then at the rear.
440
360
10. Then remove the shaft from the steering carriage (see arrow) so that you can place the jack centrally.
11. Position the steering carriage centrally beneath the frame of the card.
12. Raise the card on the rectangular tube using the jack. Remove the support blocks and carefully lower
the card onto the steering carriage.
330 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Appendix
13. Screw the shaft of the steering carriage back on.

14. Raise the card at the rear on the rectangular tube using the jack. Remove the support blocks and
carefully lower the card onto the rollers.
15. Carefully tow the card into place using a fork-lift truck.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 331

Appendix
16. Raise the card in the place where it is to stand in two stages using the jack (see steps 4 to 6) and
lower it onto the support blocks.
17. Unscrew the rollers from the rear of the card frame and remove the steering carriage from beneath the
card.
18. Place four round steel bars parallel to each other under the card frame.
19. Firstly lower the card onto the support blocks in two stages using the jack (see step 9).
20. Lower the card onto the round steel bars.
280
30
Ø
21. Align the card and place base plates underneath the eight stand bolts of the machine frame.
22. Raise the card by screwing the stand bolts and remove the round steel bars.
332 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Appendix
Delivery without a container

If the card is delivered without a container, two Caution
additional transporting devices are enclosed. Possible damage to the web doffer when
The card can be transported by crane with the help raising the card with the rope sling.
of a traverse and two rope slings. Clamp the foam cushions delivered with
the card between the card and the rope
DANGER sling.
Risk of death from falling loads!
1. Release the card from the pallet as described
Adhere to the relevant safety regulations
onwards from page 326 in steps 1 to 6 and fit
for the securing of loads and the opera-
with the transport aids.
tion of cranes.
2. Use the rope slings and the traverse as
shown in the following figure.
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 333

Appendix
Stopping the machine

Initial start-up and stoppage, disassembly and Disassembly
disposal are not contained in these operating
instructions as these tasks must be carried out by DANGER
Trützschler after-sales service staff only. This also Risk of serious injury from the clothings!
applies to temporary stoppage of the machine, A clothing wire is fitted to a roll under
for instance, if the machine is to be transferred to tension. If for instance you cut the cloth-
another location. ing wire with bolt cutters, the toothed
ends of the wire will jump around uncon-
Caution trollably.
Risk of serious damage to the machine! To remove the clothings, use the
If you wish to take the machine out of special tools which are available from
operation yourself, make sure that there Trützschler. This is the only way to
is no residual material in the machine. remove the clothings safely.
Residual material hardens and can
cause damage serious to the machine Caution
when it is being re-started. Possible damage to the machine assem-
You can prepare stoppage of the machine as fol- bly groups!
lows: If disassembled incorrectly, the assembly
groups may become irreparably dam-
1. Convey or manually remove residual material aged. For more information, contact the
from the machine. Trützschler after-sales service depart-
2. Switch off the master switch. ment.
3. Allow all further steps to be performed by the

Disposal
Trützschler after sales service department.
Operating media, electronic modules, recyclable
materials and other parts of the machine must be
disposed of according to national and regional
environmental laws. For more detailed information
on disposal, contact the relevant local authority.
334 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Index
A Carding gap optimisation with T-CON 43

Carding gap, PFS-M, adjusting 70
Abbreviations 318
Change points 109
ABR16 207, 208
Channel connector, cleaning 254
Activating 264
Check the ICFD value
Actuation, rotary can plate, setting 66, 67
TC 07 SENSOFEED 221
ADB3 204
Checking pneumatic connections 220, 226
Adjusting the PFS-M carding gap 70
Cleaning instructions 233
Automatic can change 42
Cleaning intervals 234
Clearer 261
Clothing strips, replacing (MAGNOTOP) 303
B Clothings
Balancing, carrying out 91 Checking 229
Basic keys 25 Different types 264
Bearings, lubricating 310 Service intervals 266
Beater 261 Code
Belt pulleys, selecting 61 Changing 52
Belt tension Resetting to default values 52
Checking 216 Code levels 51
Measuring and setting on the flats transport Coiler 23
belt 219 Comb boxes in the feed table, cleaning 242
Setting 218 Communication interfaces, activating 72
WEBFEED Plus 261 Communication menu 72
Belt type 216 Compressor TC-CI 258
Blade adjustment system, PMS-M 20 Condition of clothings, checking 229
Adjusting the machine configuration 59 Continuous suction 60
Setting 69 Cover sections, setting 125
Blade cleaning 62 Covers of the cylinder, cleaning 253
Blowing device Current drafts, displaying 77
Feeler 220 Current measured values, displaying 78
Gore 220 CV value limit, setting 71
Braking unit, setting 113 CV values 83
Buttons 24, 28 Cylinder covers, cleaning 253
C D
Can change 42 Date and time, setting 53
Can change speed 62 Degree of cleaning, adjusting 20
Lowering 62 Delivery rolls
Setting 67 Belts, replacing 251
Can changer 23 Loading of rolls 99
Can diameter, selecting 58 Replacing 97
Can filling position 23 Roll position 98
Can filling, setting 67 Rolls, gap 99
Can monitoring, setting 62 Setting 96, 98
Card Delivery speed 65
Balancing 91 Delivery unit, selecting 96
Switching off 49 Depth of penetration of the flat strips roll,
Switching on 37 setting 107
Card - coiler tension, setting 66 DFK
Card lubrication schedule 310 Balancing 91
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 335

Cleaning 237 Flats clothing, condition 229
Switching on and off 74 Flats run monitoring, setting 309
Switching the slide valve on and off 60 Flats speed, setting 68
DFK outlet filter, setting 114 Flats transport belt, replacing 304
DFK target pressure, setting 65 Flats, attaching 308
Diagnostics / Statistic menu 75, 82 Flexible bends, setting 101
DIRECTFEED DFK 17 Frequency converter 210
Displaying current program version values 27 Funnel control 74
Disposal 334
Doffer clothing
Activating 287 G
Condition 231
Gearing diagram 109
Wire shapes 264
Glossary 318
Doffer section 17, 22
Graphite pins, setting 309
Doffer section, cleaning 247
Greases 312
Doffer, lower cover sections, cleaning 248
Grinding 264
Door locking, testing 75
Grinding device, TC-GD, fitting 283
Draft deviation 83
Guiding profile, cleaning 252
Draft V3, changing 110
Draft V4
drive wheel, changing 111
setting on operating unit 66 I
Draft, setting 65 ICFD 90
Drafts, displaying 77 ICFD value, checking
Drives, checking 228 TC 06 EASYFEED 222
Inching key 26
Indicator lamp 34
E Indicator lamp, checking 226
Information about the machine 75
EASYFEED 19
Inspection work 213
Calibration 106
Integral tray
Settings 104
SENSOFEED 17, 19
EBO32 205, 206
Intervals for maintenance work 234
Emergency stop push-button 14
Enhanced point 264
Equipment, additional 317
Equipment, standard 317 K
Expendable parts 319 Key switch 214
Keys 25
KIT 72
F
Fan MTT 60
Switching on and off 64 L
Fault message 183 Language, selecting 52
Feed roll, tuft feeder, setting 104 LED displays in the control cabinet 199
Feed tray, EASYFEED 19 Licker-in clothing, condition 231
Filter box 59 Licker-in unit
Filter box, cleaning 259 Function 20
Fine adjustment, performing 91 WEBFEED 17
Fixed flats 17 WEBFEED Plus 261
Fixed flats clothing, condition 232 Limit value, number of thick spots, setting 71
Flat strips roll Limits, menu 71
Cleaning 244 Listing can data 89
depth of penetration, setting 107 Loading (table)
Flats adjustment, PFS-M 59 Delivery rolls 100
Flats clothing, activating 291 Squeezing rolls 95
336 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Loading of rolls MULTI WEBCLEAN system
Delivery rolls 99 Description 21
Squeezing rolls 95 Item 17
Log book, calling up 77
Long-life clothings, service intervals 274
Lot N
changing colour 57 NCT
Creating a new 56 data 87
Delete 57 Particle statistics 87
Displaying 56 Web statistics 87
Renaming 56 NCT internal fault 73
Selecting 56 NCT monitor
Lot data setting the margin 73
Listing 82 Switching on and off 75
Overview 82 NCT monitoring 73
Lot data, menu 65 NCT parameter set 73
Lot management 55
Lower cover sections, setting 125
Lower trunk, tuft feeder
Cleaning 239
O
Removing 238 Operating hours counter 75
Lubricants, table 312 Operating status of servo modules 200
Operating unit 24
Operator
Changing 40, 54
M changing name 54
Machine balancing, performing 90 Creating 54
Machine configuration, menu 58 deleting name 54
Machine settings, menu 61 deleting production data 54
Machine sides, definition 10 Management 53
Machine, stopping 334 Options 317
MAGNOTOP clothing strips, replacing 303 Order numbers 319
Main cylinder 17
Main cylinder clothing
Activating 282 P
Condition 230
Parameter set, NCT 73
Main cylinder speed
Part numbers, expendable parts 319
Increasing 12
PFS-M adjustment 101
Setting 68
PFS-M flats adjustment 59
Main drive, selecting 58
Manual 297
Maintenance 233
Motorised 297
Maintenance intervals 234
PFS-M log book, calling up 77
Changing 78
Piecing up 38
Resetting 78
Manual can change 42
Selecting 59
Manual shift change 80
Setting 69
Master switch 14
PMS-M opening angle, setting 105
Maximum V4 draft, setting 66
Power supply module 202
Measured values, displaying 78
Power supply VNB1 209
Measuring funnel, cleaning 251
Production and quality data 82
Metal detector, switching on and off 74
Production and speed 116, 130, 143
Minimum V4 draft, setting 66
Production data, deleting 54
Monitoring suction pressure 74
Production, increasing 12
Motors, checking 227
Program change 57
Motors, sense of rotation, checking 227
Program version, displaying 75
Pulley diameter, selecting 61
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 337

Q Sliver cutter 62
Sliver deposit system, selecting 58
Quality diagrams 82
Sliver feed 22
Quality faults, acknowledging with code 64
Sliver monitoring, activating 92
Sliver trumpet, coiler 23
Sliver weight deviation 84
R Slow speed, setting 67
Removal 334 Slow-down time, cylinder 113
Repairs and maintenance 263 SM10 201
Reversing 212, 227 SM20, SM 30, SM 40 200
Revolving flat clothing, activating 291 SM30 201
Revolving flat system 17, 21 Specialist terms 318
Revolving flats area, cleaning 246 Spectrogram 84
RIK module 211 Spectrogram analysis 85
Roll holders, fitting 291 Speed limit, DFK roll, setting 61
Roll position, delivery rolls 98 Speed, 1st licker-in, setting 68
Rolls, gap Squeezing rolls, setting 94
Delivery rolls 99 Standard clothings
Squeezing rolls 94 Service intervals 266
Rotary can plate, setting 67 Start key 26
Rotational speeds 77 Starting speed, setting 66
Stop key 26
Storage 325
S Strips with clothing, replacing 299
Suction ducts 235
SE servo module 202
Suction hoods, cleaning 235
Sense of rotation of motors, checking 227
Suction pressure 63
SENSOFEED 17
Calibration 106
Settings 104
Separate flat strips suction 59 T
Serial number 75 T-CON
Service functions menu 74 Checking 223
Service intervals Description 35, 43
Long-life clothings 278 Gap recommendation 46
Standard clothings 270 Normal mode 43
Service mode 214 Putting into operation 88
Servo drive type depositing system 60 Switching monitoring on and off 71
Servo modules 199 Switching on and off 58
Setting the delivery speed 65 Temperature measurement 43
Setting the limit values for TC-NCT 72 Technical data 313
Settings Thick spots 86
For 100 % cotton 116 Setting 71
For 100 % polyester 130 Switching monitoring on and off 64
For 100 % viscose 143 Time, setting 53
For this machine 168 TKN 72
Shift calendar 81 TMS-2 199
Shift change TMS-2 control system 199
At midnight 80 TMS-2 modules 203
Manual 80 Tolerance, web thickness 63
With operator change 80 Toothed belt tension 217
Shift data 79 Touch screen 24
Displaying 80 Touchscreen 24
Printing 80 Transport 325
Slide valve, DFK 60 Transport air outlet filter, setting 114
Sliver count, specifying 65, 91 Transporting device 325, 333
338 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Transverse web delivery belt, servicing 260
Traverse 333
TST 72
Tuft feeder 17, 18
Tuft feeder, cleaning 237
Twin-top cassette
Installing 301
Removing 298
Type plates 10
Type, servo drive, coiling plate 60
U
Unit for the sliver count, selecting 52
Unit of measurement, selecting 52
Units, selecting 52
Upper trunk, tuft feeder, cleaning 237
V
Valves, checking 226
Vibration frequency, drive belts 216
V-ledge 101
VNB2 209
W
Warnings 195
Web doffing section 17, 22
Cleaning 250
WEBFEED
Description 20
Item 17
WEBFEED Plus
Activating 60
Belt tension 261
Gap dimensions for opener and clearer 262
Setting speed 69
WEBSPEED OPEN, setting 61
WEBSPEED, cleaning 250
Z
ZPB4 203
914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 339

340 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008
Postfach 41 01 64
Telephone +49 2166 607-0
Fax +49 2166 607-405
E-mail info@truetzschler.de

TC07&TC06

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TC07&TC06

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TC07&TC06

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S Card

Type No. 914 22 01 / 914 22 21

Trützschler GmbH & Co. KG

914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 9

Definition of machine sides

10 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

The type plate on the tuft feeder can be found

The type plate with the electrical connection data is

914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 11

Organisational measures Avoiding machine damage

12 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 13

Safety devices on the machine

Master switch Door safety mechanisms

14 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Symbols employed Conventions employed in

1. Select the basic mask.

2. Start the machine.

914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 15

16 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Functions of the machine

1 DIRECTFEED DFK tuft feeder 8 Doffer section

914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 17

DIRECTFEED tuft feeder

18 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

SENSOFEED integral tray

EASYFEED feed tray

914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 19

WEBFEED licker-in unit

PMS-M blade adjustment system

20 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

The MULTI WEBCLEAN system and the revolving flats system

1 Cover section (fixed arrangement) 11 Cleaning element (fixed arrangement)

914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 21

22 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Options for sliver delivery

CCA automatic coiler

With an automatic CCA coiler, the turnstile (6)

914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 23

The card's operating unit

24 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

After a certain amount of time, the touch screen

914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 25

Inching key / inching mode

26 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Basic mask, top rows

No. Symbol Designation Function or significance

914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 27

Symbols for machine status Basic buttons

28 914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008

Basic mask, main area

No. Symbol Designation Function or significance

13 Cylinder drive Switch main cylinder drive on and off

914 22 01 / 914 22 21 • TC 06 / TC 07 / TC 07 S • en • 03/2008 29